Yamaha S306 de handleiding

Categorie
Barebones voor pc / werkstation
Type
de handleiding
IMPORTANT
—Check your power supply—
Make sure that your local AC
mains voltage matches the
voltage specified on the name
plate on the bottom panel. In
some areas a voltage selector
may be provided on the bottom
panel of the main keyboard unit
near the power cord. Make sure
that the voltage selector is set for
the voltage in your area. The
voltage selector is set at 240V
when the unit is initially shipped.
To change the setting use a
"minus" screwdriver to rotate the
selector dial so that the correct
voltage appears next to the
pointer on the panel.
For information on assembling
the keyboard stand, refer to the
instructions at the end of this
manual.
WICHTIG
—Überprüfen Sie Ihren
Netzanschluss—
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die
Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen
Stromnetz mit der Spannung
übereinstimmt, die auf dem
Typenschild auf der Unterseite
des Instruments angegeben ist. In
bestimmten Regionen ist auf der
Unterseite des Keyboards in der
Nähe des Netzkabels ein
Spannungswähler angebracht.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der
Spannungswähler auf die
Spannung Ihres lokalen
Stromnetzes eingestellt ist. Dieser
Spannungswähler ist bei
Auslieferung auf 240 V
eingestellt. Sie können die
Einstellung mit einem
Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern.
Drehen Sie dazu den
Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf
dem Instrument auf die richtige
Spannung zeigt.
Weitere Informationen über die
Montage des Keyboard-Ständers
erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen
am Ende dieses Handbuchs.
IMPORTANT
—Contrôler la source
d'alimentation—
Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée
sur le panneau inférieur
correspond à la tension du
secteur. Dans certaines régions,
l'instrument peut être équipé d'un
sélecteur de tension situé sur le
panneau inférieur du clavier à
proximité du cordon
d'alimentation.
Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien
réglé en fonction de la tension
secteur de votre région. Le
sélecteur de tension est réglé sur
240 V au départ d'usine. Pour
modifier ce réglage, utilisez un
tournevis à lame plate pour
tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre
l'indication correspondant à la
tension de votre région vis à vis
du repère triangulaire situé sur le
panneau.
Pour obtenir des informations sur
l'assemblage du support du
clavier, reportez-vous aux
instructions à la fin de ce manuel.
IMPORTANTE
—Verifique la alimentación de
corriente—
Asegúrese de que tensión de
alimentación de CA de su área
corresponde con la tensión
especificada en la placa de
características del panel inferior.
En algunas zonas puede haberse
incorporado un selector de
tensión en el panel inferior de la
unidad del teclado principal,
cerca del cable de alimentación.
Asegúrese de que el selector de
tensión esté ajustado a la tensión
de su área. El selector de tensión
se ajusta a 240V cuando la
unidad sale de fábrica. Para
cambiar el ajuste, emplee un
destornillador de cabeza "recta"
para girar el selector de modo
que aparezca la tensión correcta
al lado del indicador del panel.
Para información sobre el
montaje del soporte del teclado,
consulte las instrucciones al final
de este manual.
CLP-370/340/330
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
OWNER’S MANUAL
CLP-S308/S306
ES
FR
DE
EN
ENGLISHDEUTSCHFRANÇAISESPAÑOL
Introduction
92-469 1 (bottom)
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions
indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety
instruction section.
See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.
The exclamation point within the
equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servic-
ing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol, within the equilateral trian-
gle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s enclo-
sure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electrical
shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is
properly installed and used in its normal and customary
manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO
NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so
unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-
mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.
Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied
if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may
also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves
the right to change or modify any of the specifications
without notice or obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-
duce products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these
goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the
law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-
rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is
approximately five years. When replacement becomes
necessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-
ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and
federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products
that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-
edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-
ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-
sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-
cates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
3
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can
fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova.
We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List
The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following:
Owner’s Manual (this book)
Introduction (page 2):
Please read this section first.
Reference (page 16):
This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinovas various functions.
Appendix (page 98):
This section introduces reference material.
Data List
You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation
Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library.
Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as “CLP-370”) in the
Model Name text box, then click the Search button.
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
*The models CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this owner’s manual.
*The illustrations and LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat dif-
ferent from those on your instrument.
*The panel illustrations shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the CLP-370.
*Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited
except for your personal use.
(CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product.
Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD.
(CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this
product.
Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD.
Trademarks:
•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries.
•SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.
•All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has
license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE
data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted
under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.
(1)B-12 1/2
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
4
ENGLISH
PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical
shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required
voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.
Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have
accumulated on it.
Use only the supplied power cord/plug.
Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and
do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on
it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything
over it.
Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it
should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it
inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the
power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have
the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.
A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.
If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden
loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke
should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,
disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage
to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold
the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.
Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used
for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.
Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.
Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the
outlet.
Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.
Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in
damage to the instrument or even injury.
Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or
heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to
prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal
components.
Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,
mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio
may generate noise.
Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally
fall over.
Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is
easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off
the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power
switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum
level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug
the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from
the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in
the instrument overheating.
Power supply/Power cord
Do not open
Water warning
Fire warning
If you notice any abnormality
Power supply/Power cord
Assembly
Location
(1)B-12 2/2
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
5
ENGLISH
Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the
power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all
components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes
of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume
controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.
(For polish-finished model) Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do
not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument’s
finish.
When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use
paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping
cloths.
•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a
finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.
Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key
cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected
by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
(For polish-finished model) Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal,
porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use
caution.
Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not
use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a
high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing
loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a
physician.
Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall
over.
Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-
ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.
Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the
possibility of accident or injury.
Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this
can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism,
possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury.
If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them
periodically using the included tool.
Saving and backing up your data
Data in the instrument’s internal memory can be lost due to operational errors or
malfunction. Be sure to save any important data to external media via a
computer connected to the instrument. (page 78)
Backing up the USB Storage device
•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you
save your important data onto two USB storage devices.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.
Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Even when the power is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you
unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
Connections
Maintenance
Handling caution
Using the bench (If included)
Saving data
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
6
ENGLISH
Accessories
“50 greats for the Piano” (Music Book)
Owner’s Manual
This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova.
Accessory CD-ROM for Windows
Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide
Bench
A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.
My Yamaha Product User Registration
The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form.
Tuning
Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.
Transporting
If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as
it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit.
Tr ansport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument
to excessive vibration or shock.
CAUTION
(CLP-S308/S306) Cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) packaged with the instrument before closing
the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument is transported.
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
7
ENGLISH
Features
Highly evolved touch and expression: Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard (CLP-330)
and Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard with artificial ivory top (CLP-340, CLP-S306)
The Graded Hammer keyboard features natural grand-piano type key weights (heavier in the low range and lighter in
the higher range) providing a pleasant playability that is unmatched by conventional electronic pianos.
The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for legato (without pedal operation) and repetitive-
striking techniques, as with a grand piano. The CLP-340 and CLP-S306 feature an “artificial ivory” keyboard top,
which simulates the moderate hygroscopic characteristics of real ivory and offers a less slippery surface, smooth key
movement, and a warm and inviting color.
Ultimate natural playability: Natural Wood (NW) keyboard with artificial ivory top
(CLP-370, CLP-S308)
In addition to the features offered by the GH3 keyboard with artificial ivory top model, the NW keyboard uses natural
wood for the inside of the white keys, as seen on an acoustic piano. This feature provides a heavier weighted touch
that surpasses that of conventional electronic pianos and is closer in feel to a grand piano.
Digital recording of a full-size concert grand piano sound (via AMW Dynamics
Stereo Sampling)
This digital piano offers a rich and versatile range of sounds, which are created using Yamaha's proprietary sampling
tone-generation system, “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling.”
AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) is a sampling system that creates sounds close to those of an acoustic instrument by
digitally recording the sounds of an instrument and applying high-quality digital filtering technology to the recorded
audio samples.
The sound waveform created by an acoustic piano differs depending on the player's strength of touch, from
pianissimo to fortissimo.
AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling can create extremely dynamic nuances by recording samples at various playing
strengths. The greater the number of samples used, the greater the resulting expressiveness of the instrument.
The piano voice “Grand Piano 1” features a totally new sample recorded from a full-size concert grand piano. Each
note in the sample has been adjusted meticulously so that the digital piano will play only the very best piano sounds.
The piano voices are well-separated sounds featuring a fast attack and a satisfying response.
The “Grand Piano 1” voice features multiple wave samples for different velocities (Dynamic Sampling). That is,
different samples are used depending on how fast or strong the player strikes the keys. Therefore, this voice
expresses detailed dynamics and sounds much closer to those of a true acoustic piano.
The CLP-370/340 creates a rich, luxurious sound using “Sustain Sampling,” which is a sample of the soundboard
and the resonance of the strings when the damper pedal is pressed. The instrument also features “Key-off Sampling,”
which is a sample of the very delicate noises that are caused when keys are released.
Internet Direct Connection function (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
You can connect these digital piano models to the Internet, enabling you to access and enjoy a broad range of song
data files that are available on a dedicated website.
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
8
Table of Contents
Introduction
About this Owner’s Manual and Data List.............................................................................. 3
Accessories............................................................................................................................... 6
Panel Controls and Terminals ............................................................................................... 10
Before Using the Clavinova................................................................................................... 12
Key Cover.....................................................................................................................................................12
Music Rest....................................................................................................................................................13
Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ......................................................................................................................14
Turning the Power On ................................................................................................................................14
Setting the Volume ......................................................................................................................................15
Using Headphones.......................................................................................................................................15
Using the Speaker Switch ............................................................................................................................ 15
Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................. 16
Reference
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................................................... 17
Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) ....................................18
A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs...................................................................................................................19
Selecting & Playing Voices .................................................................................................... 20
Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................20
Using the Pedals...........................................................................................................................................21
Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/
[EFFECT]/[DAMPER RES.] .......................................................................................................................22
Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH].................................................................................................................. 24
Transposition — [TRANSPOSE] ...............................................................................................................25
Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ........................................................................................................26
Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340) ............27
Using the Metronome .................................................................................................................................29
Recording Your Performance................................................................................................ 30
Recording a performance quickly...............................................................................................................30
Playing back a recorded song......................................................................................................................32
Re-recording a previously recorded song................................................................................................... 32
Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts ...............................................................................................................33
Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) ...............................................35
Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device......................................................................... 36
About Save and Load...................................................................................................................................36
Saving a Song ...............................................................................................................................................37
Loading a Song.............................................................................................................................................38
Deleting Song Files ......................................................................................................................................39
Formatting the USB Storage Device ...........................................................................................................40
Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc.) ............................................41
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks.......................................................................42
Playing Back Songs................................................................................................................ 43
Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument...............................................................................44
Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device ...............................................................................45
Useful Playback Functions ..........................................................................................................................45
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
9
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ............................................... 46
Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection ..................................................................................46
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet................................................................................................ 48
About the Internet Settings .........................................................................................................................49
Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) ..................................................51
Exporting the Connection Information .....................................................................................................52
Other Internet Operations .......................................................................................................................... 53
Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ................................... 56
Glossary of Internet Terms..........................................................................................................................57
Initializing the data......................................................................................................................................58
Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] ......................................................................................... 59
Basic Procedure in Function Mode ............................................................................................................60
About Each Function................................................................................................................................... 62
F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch.................................................................................................................. 62
F2. Selecting a Scale ...............................................................................................................................63
F3. Dual Mode Functions......................................................................................................................64
F4. (CLP-370/340) Split Mode Functions ............................................................................................65
F5. (CLP-370/340) / F4. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Other Functions ..............................................66
F6. (CLP-370/340) / F5. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Metronome Volume .......................................67
F7. (CLP-370/340) / F6. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Functions .............................................. 67
F8. (CLP-370/340) / F7. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Backup Functions............................................70
F8.5 (CLP-370/340)/ F7.5 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Character Code ............................................70
F9. (CLP-370/340)/ F8. (CLP-S308/S306) LAN Settings .....................................................................70
Connections........................................................................................................................... 71
Connectors...................................................................................................................................................71
Connection to a USB storage device........................................................................................................... 73
Connecting a Personal Computer ..............................................................................................................75
Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument................................ 76
Loading Song Data from a Computer to the Instrument.......................................................................... 76
Transmitting Song Data from the Instrument to a Computer .................................................................77
Data Backup........................................................................................................................... 78
Message List .......................................................................................................................... 79
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 80
Options .................................................................................................................................. 80
CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly ..................................................................................... 81
CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................. 84
CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly.......................................................................... 87
Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340).................................................... 91
Preset Voice List .................................................................................................................... 92
Demo Song List ..................................................................................................................... 95
Index...................................................................................................................................... 96
Appendix
Factory Setting List................................................................................................................ 98
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 100
Panel Controls and Terminals
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
10
Panel Controls and Terminals
PHONES
SPEAKER
NORMAL
OFF
ON
HP. SW
USB TO DEVICE
SELECT
^
# %$
*
1
(
¢
&
7 @
8 )
2 3
9
!645
CLP-370/340/330
USB
TO DEVICE
TO HOST
MIDI
IN
OUT
THRU
AUX IN
L/L+R
R
L/L+R
R
AUX OUT
£
º
§
¡
(
The panel illustrations shown are taken from the CLP-370.
This illustration shown is taken from the
CLP-370.
Front
Pedal jack for CLP-340/330 is next
to the MIDI jacks.
Pedal jack for CLP-S308/S306 is
next to the LAN Jack.
Shows the jacks as seen when viewed from below the
instrument.
Shows the jacks as seen when viewed
from below the instrument.
CLP-370/340 only
CLP-370/
340 only
Left Right
CLP-370/
340 only
Front
CLP-S308/S306
£
¡º §
Panel Controls and Terminals
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
11
1 [POWER] switch .............................page 14
2 [MASTER VOLUME] slider..............page 15
Adjust the volume level using this slider.
3 [DEMO] button ..............................page 16
Demonstration playback is available for each voice.
4 [TRANSPOSE] button.....................page 25
You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or
down so that the pitch will match that of another
instrument or singer, while you play the same,
unshifted keys.
5 [REC] button .................................page 30
For recording your keyboard performance.
6 [RIGHT], [LEFT] buttons
............................................... pages 18, 33
For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as
required so you can practice the corresponding part
(the part that is turned off) on the keyboard.
7 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons
............................................... pages 16, 44
For playing back the preset songs or your recorded
songs, etc. You can also play back songs from the
Internet over a special website.
8 [SONG SELECT] button ......... pages 17, 56
For selecting a song to play back or edit.
9 [FILE] button ......................... pages 36, 40
For saving songs to and loading songs from a USB
storage device, as well as managing song files. Also,
lets you format a USB storage device.
)
[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button
............................................... pages 29, 60
For changing the song tempo (speed) and selecting
other useful functions (pages 59 – 70).
! [METRONOME] button
............................................... pages 29, 67
For using the metronome.
@ Display............................................page 14
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power to the instrument while
flashing dashes appear in the display (indicating the
operation is in process). Doing so may damage the
data.
# [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons
For setting values or performing file operations.
Pressing both buttons simultaneously for certain
value settings (Transpose, Tempo, etc.) restores the
default value.
$ Voice group buttons ......................page 20
For selecting voices from 14 internal sounds includ-
ing Grand Piano 1 and 2. You can also combine two
voices and use them together. (Only the CLP-370 and
CLP-340 has the [VARIATION] button.)
% [SPLIT] button (CLP-370/340).......page 27
For playing different voices on the left- and right-
hand sections of the keyboard.
^ [BRILLIANCE], [REVERB], [EFFECT]
buttons .......................................... page 22
For adjusting the brightness of the sound and adding
reverb effects to the sound.
& [TOUCH] button ............................ page 24
For adjusting the touch response.
* [DAMPER RES.] button ................. page 23
For turning the Damper Resonance function on or
off. When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simu-
lates the sustain sound that occurs when you press
the damper pedal of a grand piano, as you press the
damper pedal and play the keyboard.
( USB [TO DEVICE] terminals........... page 72
For connecting the instrument to a USB storage
device, allowing saving/loading of data to and from
the connected device. On the CLP-370 and CLP-340,
there are two TO DEVICE terminals, A and B, which
can be specified using the [SELECT] switch.
º AUX OUT [L/ L+R][R] jacks ............ page 71
For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to an
external audio system.
¡ AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ............... page 72
For connecting an external tone generator, allowing
you to play the sound of that device via the Clavi-
novas internal sound system and speakers.
USB [TO HOST] terminal .............. page 72
For connecting the instrument to your computer,
allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the
Clavinova and the computer.
£ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals
....................................................... page 72
For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the
use of various MIDI functions.
¢ [PHONES] jacks, [SPEAKER] switch
....................................................... page 15
For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones,
allowing private practice. The [SPEAKER] switch
turns the internal speakers on or off.
PEDALS........................................... page 21
For producing a range of expressive effects similar to
those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.
The left pedal can also be assigned to a variety of
functions.
§ [LAN] jack (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
....................................................... page 72
For connecting a LAN cable to access special Internet
websites for this instrument, and playing songs from
the Internet.
[PEDAL] jack .................................. page 83
For connecting a pedal cable.
Before Using the Clavinova
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
12
Before Using the Clavinova
Key Cover
CLP-370/340/330
To open the key cover:
Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.
To close the key cover:
Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over
the keys.
CLP-S308/S306
To open the key cover:
1. Hold the front edge of the key cover top with both
hands, then open the key cover slowly.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your fingers (or those of children)
when opening or closing it.
2. Close the edge of the key cover. (Fold it down so that it
is flat with the cover.)
To close the key cover:
1. If the music rest is unfolded, fold it back.
2. Unfold the edge of the key cover.
3. Hold the key cover with both hands and close it
slowly.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your fingers (or those of children)
when opening or closing it.
Be careful to avoid catching your
fingers when opening or closing the
cover.
Before Using the Clavinova
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
13
Music Rest
CLP-370/340/330
To raise the music rest:
1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go.
2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear
of the music rest.
3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports.
To lower the music rest:
1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go.
2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest).
3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down.
CAUTION
Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When low-
ering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest
until it is all the way down.
CLP-S308/S306
Unfold the music rest
When opening the key cover, unfold the music rest.
Fold the music rest
When closing the key cover, fold the music rest.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your fingers or the fingers of child when opening or closing it.
CAUTION
Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover
may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric
shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument.
CAUTION
Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] A terminal before closing the key
cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device.
CAUTION
(CLP-S308/S306) When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87)
before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched.
Before Using the Clavinova
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
14
Music Braces (CLP-370/340)
These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place.
Tur ning the Power On
1.Connect the power cord.
Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC IN on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet.
In some areas, a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.
WARNING
Make sure your instrument is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on
the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main
keyboard unit near the AC IN. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to
the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!
Use only the AC power cord supplied with the Clavinova. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced,
contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard!
The type of AC power cord provided with the Clavinova may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased.
(In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT
modify the plug provided with the Clavinova. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
2.Turn the power on.
Press the [POWER] switch.
•The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.
When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again.
•The display and the power indicator turn off.
NOTE
Power indicator
If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is
still on.
To open To close
1-1 1-2
(The shape of plug differs
depending on locale.)
(bottom surface)
CLP-370/340/330
Shows the AC IN as
seen when viewed from
below the instrument.
CLP-S308/S306
AC IN is located on the
rear of the instrument.
Display
Power indicator
[POWER] switch
Normally indicates tempo.
Before Using the Clavinova
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
15
Setting the Volume
Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about halfway between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you
start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level.
CAUTION
Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time; doing so may damage your hearing.
Using Headphones
Connect a pair of headphones to one of the
[PHONES] jacks.
Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.
You can connect two sets of standard stereo head-
phones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones,
you can plug them into either jack.)
Using the Headphone Hanger
A headphone hanger is included in the Clavinova pack-
age so that you can conveniently hang the headphones
on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using
included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure.
CAUTION
Do not hang anything other than the headphones on
the hanger. Doing so may damage the Clavinova or the
hanger.
Using the Speaker Switch
This switch turns the internal speakers on or off.
NORMAL (HP. SW) ......... The speakers produce sound as long as a pair of
headphones is not connected.
ON ....................................... The speakers always produce sound.
OFF ...................................... The speakers produce no sound.
TERMINOLOGY
MASTER VOLUME:
The volume level of the entire keyboard sound.
NOTE
You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX OUT level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
The level decreases. The level increases.
PHONES
SPEAKER
NORMAL
OFF
ON
HP. SW
standard
stereo
phone plug
bottom surface
PHONES
SPEAKER
NORMAL
OFF
ON
HP. SW
Listening to the Demonstration Tunes
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
16
Listening to the Demonstration Tunes
Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the Clavinova’s voices.
1. Turn the power on.
(In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] switch.
When the power is turned ON, one of the voice button LEDs will light.
Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about half way between the “MIN”
and “MAX settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER
VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level.
2. Engage Demo mode.
Press the [DEMO] button to engage Demo mode. The voice button indicators
will flash in sequence.
3. Play a Voice demo.
Press one of the voice buttons to start playback of all songs starting from the
corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that
voice button. (If you press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button instead of a voice
button or only waiting (not press any keys) a short while, the GRAND PIANO 1
demo tune will begin playback.)
4. Stop the Voice demo and exit from Demo mode.
Press the [DEMO] or SONG [STOP] button.
CLP
-
370
3
43
1
24
Procedure
NOTE
For a list of the demo songs, see
page 95.
NOTE
MIDI reception is not possible in
Demo Song mode.
Demo song data is not transmitted
via the MIDI terminals.
NOTE
Demo mode cannot be engaged
during User song recording
(page 30) or file operations (page
36).
TERMINOLOGY
Mode:
A mode is a status under which
you can execute a certain function.
In Demo mode, you can play back
demonstration tunes.
NOTE
You cannot adjust the tempo of
demo songs.
You cannot use the part cancel
function (page 18) or the song
A-B repeat function (page 19) in
Demo mode.
NOTE
On the CLP-370/340, you can
demo the piano voices with vari-
ous effects by pressing the
[VARIATION] button, then press-
ing the desired voice button.
Refer to the “Piano Voice Demo
Description” on page 95 for the
complete list of demo sounds for
the piano voices with various
effects.
Reference
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
17
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can simply listen to these songs
or use them for practice (page 18). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” that
contains scores for the 50 piano preset songs.
1. Engage Preset Song mode.
Press the [SONG SELECT] button a few times until the “PRESET indicator
lights.
2. Play any of the 50 preset songs.
2-1 Press the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select a number of the tune you want to
play (the number will appear on the LED display) or select a playing method.
1 – 50: Select a preset song number and play only the song.
r n d: Play all preset songs continuously in random order.
ALL: Play all preset songs in sequence.
2-2 Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
Adjust the Volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume.
Adjust the Tempo
You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ,
]
buttons to adjust the playback tempo
as required. The default tempo can be
recalled by simultaneously pressing the
[] and [] buttons.
3. Stop playback.
Playback will stop automatically when the selected preset song has finished. To
stop the song during playback (or continuous playback), press the SONG
[STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/
PAUSE] button.
•To play back another song continuously, see procedure 2 above.
4. Exit from Preset Song mode.
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to exit Preset Song mode. The indicator
turns off, and the unit returns to normal play mode.
How to use the practice functions
You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the
corresponding part (part cancel function) and continuously repeat a specified phrase
within a song (song A-B repeat function). For more information, see pages 18–19.
CLP
-
370
42-1
2-23
1
Procedure
NOTE
Preset Song mode cannot be
engaged while the unit is in Demo
Song mode (page 16) or during
song playback (page 44), User
song recording (page 30), or file
operations (page 36).
TERMINOLOGY
Song:
Performance data is called a
“Song.” This includes demonstra-
tion tunes and piano preset tunes.
NOTE
You can play the keyboard along
with the preset song. You can
change the voice playing on the
keyboard.
NOTE
You can adjust the Brilliance con-
trol (page 22) and Reverb type
(page 22) that is applied to preset
song playback.
You can change the Effect set-
tings (page 23) and Touch sensi-
tivity (page 24) for the keyboard
voice you play.
NOTE
The default tempo “0” is automati-
cally selected whenever a new
preset song is selected, or when
playback of a new preset song
begins during “ALL” or “r n d”
playback.
NOTE
When you select a different song
(or a different song is selected
during chained playback), appro-
priate reverb and effect types will
be selected accordingly.
This produces a relative tempo varia-
tion, with a range from “–50” through
“0” to “50” at maximum; the range will
differ depending on the selected
song.
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
18
Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs
(Part Cancel Function)
The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the
left- and right-hand parts on or off as desired, in order to practice the corresponding part (the part
that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part
is played by [LEFT].
1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.
After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button to turn
off the corresponding part.
When you first select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up, indi-
cating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to
turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corre-
sponding part playback is muted.
•Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles playback between on and off.
2. Start playback and playing.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you
just turned off.
Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard
(Sync Start)
When the Sync Start function is engaged, playback of the selected preset song will
begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard.
To engage the Sync Start function, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP]
and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.)
Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard.
Left Pedal Play/Pause
The left pedal can be assigned to play and pause preset song playback via the
“Left Pedal Mode function described on page 66.
3. Stop playback.
When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the
top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the
SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG
[PLAY/PAUSE]
button.
CLP
-
370
1
23
NOTE
The Preset Song Part Cancel
function cannot be used during
“ALL” or “r n d” (page 17) play-
back.
NOTE
The parts can be turned on or off
even during playback.
Procedure
NOTE
Both parts are automatically
turned ON whenever a new song
is selected.
Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
19
A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs
The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a specified phrase within a preset song.
Combined with the Part Cancel function described on page 18, this provides an excellent way to
practice difficult phrases.
1. Specify the beginning (A) and the end (B) of the
phrase, and start practicing.
Select and play a preset song, then press the [TEMPO/
FUNCTION] button at the beginning of the phrase
you want to repeat.
This sets the A point ( will appear on the dis-
play).
To specify the end (B) of the phrase, press the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button a second time at the
end of the phrase.
This sets the “B point ( will appear on the dis-
play).
At this point, repeat playback will begin between the
specified A and B points.
2. Stop playback.
Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback while retaining the specified
A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if you press the SONG [PLAY/
PAUSE] button.
To cancel the A and B points, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button once.
CLP
-
370
12
Procedure
NOTE
The A-B Repeat function cannot
be used during “ALL” or “r n d”
(page 17) playback.
NOTE
•To set the “A” point at the very
beginning of the song, press
the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] but-
ton before starting playback.
•You can have the B point auto-
matically be set to the song’s
end, by setting the A point and
letting the song play to the end.
NOTE
An automatic lead-in (to help
guide you into the phrase) starts
at the A point of the song.
NOTE
The A and B points are automati-
cally canceled when a new song
is selected.
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
20
Selecting & Playing Voices
Selecting Voices
Select the desired voice by pressing one of the Voice buttons.
Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider for the most
comfortable listening level.
CLP
-
370
Voice buttons
Procedure
NOTE
To learn characteristics of the
voices, listen to demo songs for
each voice (page 16). Refer to
“Preset Voice List” on page 92 for
more information on the charac-
teristics of each preset voice.
TERMINOLOGY
Voice:
On the Clavinova, a voice means
a “tone” or “tonal color.”
NOTE
You can control the loudness of a
voice by adjusting the force with
which you strike the keys,
although different playing styles
(touch sensitivities) have little or
no effect with certain musical
instruments.
Refer to “Preset Voice List” on
page 92.
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
21
Using the Pedals
The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range
of expressive effects similar to those produced by the
pedals on an acoustic piano.
Damper (Right) Pedal
The damper pedal functions in the same way as a
damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper
pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal
immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.
The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive
half-pedal function.
When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simulates the
sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper
pedal of a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal
and play the keyboard.
Sostenuto (Center) Pedal
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the
sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes
will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the
damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently
played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible
to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are
played “staccato.
Soft (Left) Pedal
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while
the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it
is pressed.
NOTE
If the damper pedal doesn’t work,
make sure that the pedal cord is
properly plugged into the jack
(pages 83, 86).
TERMINOLOGY:
Half-pedal:
While playing the piano with Sus-
tain and you want to slightly mute
the sustained sound, release the
damper pedal from maximum
position to half position.
NOTE
The depth of the effect produced
by the “Sustain Samples” can be
adjusted via the “Sustain Sample
Depth” (page 66) in Function
mode.
When you press the damper
pedal here, the notes you
play before you release the
pedal have a longer sustain.
NOTE
Organ, string and choir voices will
continue to sound for as long as
the sostenuto pedal is depressed.
When you press the soste-
nuto pedal here while hold-
ing the note, the note will
sustain as long as you hold
the pedal.
NOTE
The left pedal can be assigned to
song play/pause operation or
variation function (CLP-370/340)
via the “Left Pedal Mode”
described on page 66.
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
22
Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION]
(CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[EFFECT]/
[DAMPER RES.]
[VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)
Lets you alter another aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type.
Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92 for more information on the characteristics of
each variation.
Pressing the [VARIATION] or selected voice button toggles the variation on and off.
The indicator lights (ON) when [VARIATION] is enabled.
[BRILLIANCE]
This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre of the sound output.
BRIGHT: Bright tone
NORMAL: Standard tone
MELLOW: Soft and mellow tone
To select a brilliance type, press the [BRILLIANCE] button a few times until the indica-
tor corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicator lights in sequence each time
you press the [BRILLIANCE] button). Brilliance can be selected among five types. When
two adjacent indicators are lit, the type that is between the two indicated types is
selected. For example, when both NORMAL and MELLOW are lit, the brilliance set-
ting between NORMAL and MELLOW is selected. This parameter affects the entire
sound of the instrument.
[REVERB]
This control enables you to select various digital reverb effects that would add extra
depth and expression to the sound to create a realistic acoustic ambience.
OFF: When no reverb effect is selected, no REVERB indicator is lit.
ROOM: This setting adds a continuous reverb effect to the sound, similar to the
acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room.
HALL 1: For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates
the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall.
HALL 2: For a truly spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simu-
lates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall.
STAGE: Simulates the reverb of a stage environment.
CLP
-
370
[–/NO] [+/YES]
buttons
[VARIATION] button
[REVERB]
button
[BRILLIANCE]
button
[EFFECT]
button
[DAMPER RES.]
button
NOTE
Normal setting = OFF
TERMINOLOGY
Normal setting:
The “Normal setting” refers to the
default setting (factory setting)
obtained when you first turn on
the power to the Clavinova.
NOTE
The left pedal can be assigned to
ON or OFF the variation via the
“Left Pedal Mode” function
described on page 66.
NOTE
Normal setting = NORMAL
NOTE
When the BRILLIANCE is set to
BRIGHT, the overall sound will be
slightly louder. If the MASTER
VOLUME is set at a high level the
sound may become distorted. If
so, lower the MASTER VOLUME
level.
Procedure
Procedure
NOTE
The default reverb type (including
OFF) and depth settings are dif-
ferent for each voice.
NOTE
Releasing the [REVERB] button
changes the reverb type.
If you have changed the reverb
depth, releasing the [REVERB]
button will not change the reverb
type.
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
23
To select an reverb type, press the [REVERB] button a few times until the indicator cor-
responding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you
press the [REVERB] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off.
Adjusting Reverb Depth
Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons
while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The cur-
rent depth setting appears on the LED display while the [REVERB] button is held.
[EFFECT]
The [EFFECT] button allows you to select an effect to give your sound greater depth
and animation.
OFF: When no effect is selected, no EFFECT indicator is lit.
CHORUS: A shimmering, broadening effect
PHASER: Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.
TREMOLO: Tremolo effect
ROTARY SP: Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker.
To select an effect type, press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corre-
sponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press
the [EFFECT] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off.
Adjusting Effect Depth
You can adjust the effect depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button.
The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED
display while the [EFFECT] button is held.
[DAMPER RES.]
The Damper Resonance lets you hear a simulation of the sustain sound of the damper
pedal on a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard.
This effect is applied to the entire sound of the instrument.
Pressing the [DAMPER RES.] button repeatedly toggles the Damper Resonance on and
off.
Adjusting DAMPER RES. Depth
You can adjust the Damper Resonance depth by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons
while holding the [DAMPER RES.] button.
The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED
display while the [DAMPER RES.] button is held.
Procedure
NOTE
Depth 0: no effect
Depth 20: maximum reverb depth
NOTE
The default effect type (including
OFF) and depth settings are dif-
ferent for each voice.
NOTE
Releasing the [EFFECT] button
changes the effect type.
If you have changed the depth
settings, releasing the [EFFECT]
button will not change the effect
type.
Procedure
NOTE
Depth 0: no effect
Depth 20: maximum effect depth
NOTE
Default depth settings are differ-
ent for each voice.
NOTE
Normal setting = ON
NOTE
Depth 0: no effect
Depth 20: maximum depth
Procedure
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
24
Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH]
You can select four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED
— to match different playing styles and preferences.
HARD:
Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness.
MEDIUM: Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response.
SOFT:
Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure.
FIXED:
All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard
is played. (No indicators are lit.) The fixed volume can be changed.
To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indica-
tor corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time
the [TOUCH] button is pressed). No indicator is lit when “FIXED” is selected.
Changing the volume when FIXED is selected
When you select FIXED, you can set the volume for notes
played
in FIXED mode by using the
[–/NO]
and
[+/YES]
buttons while
you hold the
[TOUCH]
button. The current volume
level
appears on the display. The volume range is from 1 through 127.
The default setting is 64.
NOTE
This setting does not change the
weight of the keyboard.
NOTE
Normal setting = MEDIUM
NOTE
The touch sensitivity type will
become the common setting for
all voices. However, the touch
sensitivity settings may have little
or no effect with certain voices
that are not normally responsive
to keyboard dynamics. (Refer to
the “Preset Voice List” on page
92.)
CLP
-
370
[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons
[TOUCH] button
Procedure
NOTE
1: minimum volume
127: maximum volume
NOTE
The touch volume set in FIXED
mode will become the common
setting for all voices.
NOTE
Releasing the [TOUCH] button
changes the touch type.
If you have changed the volume,
releasing the [TOUCH] button will
not change the touch type.
(FIXED mode will remain
selected.)
Volume range
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
25
Transposition — [TRANSPOSE]
The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or
down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily
match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you
set the transposition amount to “5,” playing a C key produces a pitch of F. In this way, you can play
a song as though it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to F major.
Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] button while holding the
[TRANSPOSE] button to transpose down or up as required.
The amount of transposition appears on the LED display
while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose
setting is “0.
The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than “0”
is selected. If a value other than “0” is selected, the [TRANSPOSE] button can be
switched the transpose function ON or OFF at any time.
CLP
-
370
[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons [TRANSPOSE] button
Procedure
TERMINOLOGY
Transpose:
Change the key signature of a
song. On the Clavinova, transpos-
ing shifts the pitch of the entire
keyboard.
NOTE
The transposition range:
–12: –12 semitones (down one
octave)
0: normal pitch
12: 12 semitones (up one octave)
Transposition
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
26
Combining Two Voices (Dual mode)
You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you
can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound.
1. Engage Dual mode.
Press two voice buttons at the same time (or press one voice button while holding
another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when Dual mode
is active.
•According to the voice numbering
priority shown in the diagram on
the right, the lower value voice
number will be designated as Voice
1 (the other voice will be desig-
nated as Voice 2).
The Function mode provides access to a number of other Dual mode functions,
such as volume balance setting or octave setting (page 64). (If you do not set
Dual mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by
default.)
2. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.
To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice button.
CLP
-
370
2
1
Procedure
NOTE (CLP-370/340)
Dual and Split (page 27) modes
cannot be engaged at the same
time.
NOTE
[VARIATION] in Dual Mode
(CLP-370/340)
The [VARIATION] button’s indica-
tor will light if the variation is
engaged for either or both of the
Dual mode voices. While Dual
mode is engaged, the [VARIA-
TION] button can be used to turn
the variation for both voices on or
off. To turn the variation on or off
for only one of the voices, hold
the voice button for the other
voice and press the button of the
voice for which you want to
change the variation.
NOTE
[REVERB] in Dual Mode
The reverb type assigned to
Voice 1 will take priority over the
other. (If the reverb is set to OFF,
Voice 2 reverb type will be in
effect.)
NOTE
[EFFECT] in Dual Mode
Depending on the conditions, one
effect type may take priority over
the other. Depth will be decided
according to the depth default
value of the voice combination.
However, using function F3 (page
64) you can adjust the depth
value for each voice to your liking.
12
12 13 14
34567
891011
Voice numbering priority
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
27
Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different
Vo ices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340)
Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and
another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric
Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand.
1. Engage Split mode.
Press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The default setting (WOOD
BASS)
will be selected for the left-hand voice at first.
The Function mode provides access to a number of other Split mode functions
(page 65). (If you make no settings for Split mode functions, the appropriate
setting will be set in each voice by default.)
2. Specify the split point (the border between the
right-and left-hand range).
(The split point is initially set at the F#2 key by default. If you do not need to
change the split point, skip this procedure.)
You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while hold-
ing the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the
LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held).
An example of split-point key display
CLP
-
370
Voice buttons [SPLIT] button
Procedure
NOTE
Dual (page 26) and Split modes
cannot be engaged simulta-
neously.
NOTE
A specified “split point” key is
included in the left-hand range.
The split point can also be
changed by simultaneously hold-
ing down the [SPLIT] button and
pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES]
button.
The default split point can be
recalled by simultaneously hold-
ing down the [SPLIT] button and
pressing both the [–/NO] and [+/
YES] buttons together.
NOTE
The split point can also be set via
Function 4 (page 65).
followed by a high bar if sharp
followed by a low bar if flat
F 2
F#2
Eb2
A -1 C1 C2 F#2C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
Normal setting=F#2
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
28
3. Select a voice for the right hand.
Press a voice button.
4. Select a voice for the left hand.
Press the corresponding voice button while holding the [SPLIT] button. (The
indicator of the Left Voice button will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed.)
To turn the variation on or off for the split voice, hold the [SPLIT] button and
press the [VARIATION] button or the currently-selected voice button.
5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.
Press the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out.
NOTE
[VARIATION] in Split Mode
You can turn the variation on or off
for Split mode voices. Normally,
the voice indicator of the right
voice lights in Split mode. The
[VARIATION] can be used to turn
the variation for the right voice on
or off as required. While the
[SPLIT] button is held, however,
the voice indicator of the left voice
lights. In this state the [VARIA-
TION] button turns the variation
for the left voice on or off.
NOTE
[REVERB] in Split Mode
The reverb type assigned to the
right voice will take priority over
the other. (If the reverb of the right
voice is set to OFF, the left voice’s
reverb type will be in effect.)
NOTE
[EFFECT] in Split Mode
Depending on the conditions, one
effect type will take priority over
the other. The depth will be
decided according to the depth
default value of the voice combi-
nation. However, using function
F4 (page 65) you can change the
depth value for each voice as you
like. Effect depth setting via the
panel controls (i.e. pressing the
[–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while
holding the [EFFECT] button —
will be applied to the right voice
only.
Selecting & Playing Voices
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
29
Using the Metronome
The Clavinova features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is conve-
nient for practicing.
1. Start the metronome.
The metronome sound is turned on by pressing
the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.
Adjusting the tempo
The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is
described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by
using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons (when the [TEMPO/FUNCTION
, ]
buttons [TEMPO] indicator is lit).
Adjusting the time signature
The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be
set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while
holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. You
can set the beat from 0 to 15. The current setting
appears on the LED display while you are holding
the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.
A beat setting of “0” plays a low click sound for all beats, while a setting of “1”
plays a high click sound for all beats; other beat settings play a high click for the
first beat in a measure and a low click for all following beats.
2. Stop the metronome.
Turn off the metronome by pressing the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.
CLP
-
370
1
2
[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons
[TEMPO/FUNCTION ▲▼] buttons
Procedure
The beat indicator flashes
at the current tempo.
NOTE
If the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] but-
ton’s [TEMPO] indicator is not lit,
press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION]
button to light the [TEMPO] indi-
cator.
NOTE
The volume of the metronome can
be adjusted via the Metronome
Volume function in Function mode
(page 67).
Beat
Recording Your Performance
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
30
Recording Your Performance
The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the instru-
ment can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just
the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing
back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two
parts separately, you could record the left-and right-hand parts sepa-
rately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they sound when
played back. The two-part Song Recorder on the instrument allows the
recording of up to three User songs (U01 – U03) to the instrument.
User songs can be saved to an optional USB storage device.
Recording a performance quickly
This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without
specifying the recording parts — useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces.
In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to right part.
CAUTION
To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s):
If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song.
Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data.
You cannot record the performance to the connected USB storage device directly. The
recorded songs are saved to the instrument automatically. If you want to save data to
the device, perform the Save operation (page 37) after stopping recording.
CLP
-
370
2 4 4 3
TERMINOLOGY
Recording vs. Saving:
The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the
Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. The Clavinova “saves” information regarding note
timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the
Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova
may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “record-
ing” because it seems to make more sense.
Recording Your Performance
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
31
1. Make all the initial settings.
Before you begin to record, select the voice you want to record (or voices if you
will be using Dual or Split mode). Make any other desired settings (reverb,
effect, etc.) as well. You might also want to set the volume.
You can also adjust the playback volume using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.
2. Engage Record Ready mode.
Press the [REC] button to engage Record Ready mode. This automatically selects
an empty song for recording and makes the RIGHT part active. If an empty
song does not exist, Song U01 will be selected. Recording does not actually start
yet.
The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will flash at the current METRONOME
tempo setting.
You can turn on the metronome in this step, and adjust the tempo by using the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons. (Range: 32 – 280)
Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC]
button again.
3. Start recording.
Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard
or press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The current measures number will
appear on the display while recording.
4. Stop recording.
Press either [REC] or SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. When recording is
stopped, dashes appear in the display in succession to indicate that the recorded
data is being saved to the instrument automatically. After the data is saved, the
song name (U01 – U03) appears in the display. The recorded part’s indicator
will glow green to indicate that it now contains data. (Record mode is disen-
gaged automatically.)
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power of the instrument when dashes appear in the display in suc-
cession. Doing so may delete all song data in the instrument, including external songs
(page 43).
Procedure
NOTE
When the instrument is in Demo
Song mode or during a file opera-
tion, Record mode cannot be
engaged.
NOTE
Recording capacity
You can record up to a maximum
three songs, or up to a maximum
of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in
each song on the instrument
depending on pedal usage and
other factors.
NOTE
If you have selected the LEFT
part previously in the same song,
the LEFT part will automatically
be made active when pressing
the [REC] button in step 2.
NOTE
If the metronome was on when
you started recording, you’ll be
able to keep time with the metro-
nome while recording, but the
metronome sound will not be
recorded.
NOTE
For more recording information,
see page 34.
NOTE
The left pedal can be assigned to
start recording via the “Left Pedal
Mode” function described on
page 66.
NOTE
If the memory becomes full dur-
ing recording, “FUL” will appear
on the display and recording will
stop automatically. (All recorded
data up to that point will be
retained.)
Recording Your Performance
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
32
Playing back a recorded song
1. Play back the recorded performance.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance.
2. Stop the performance.
To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button.
Re-recording a previously recorded song
This section explains how to record again in case your performance
was not satisfactory.
1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for
recording, if necessary.
Repeat Step 1 on page 31 if you wish to change the previous settings.
For more information of the recorded data see page 34.
2. Re-engage Record Ready mode.
Press the [REC] button, again.
The selected part’s indicator lights in red.
Follow the procedure from Step 3 in “Recording a performance quickly” on
page 31 to re-record.
Procedure
Procedure
NOTE
If you want to change the tempo,
reverb type, or effect type when
re-recording a part or when
recording to another part, do so
after you engage Record Ready
mode.
You cannot re-record in the mid-
dle of a song.
Deleting a selected part
Pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording, then pressing the SONG
[STOP] button to stop recording will erase all previously recorded data on the selected
part.
Recording Your Performance
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
33
Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts
This lets you record the right and left parts separately. Since you can record the left part while play-
ing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet.
1. Make all the initial settings.
Same as step 1 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31.
2. Select a song to record.
Press the [SONG SELECT] button to light “USER” indicator on, then press the
[–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song for recording.
CAUTION
To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s):
If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song.
Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data.
3. Engage Record Ready mode.
Press the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button to engage
Record Ready mode. Recording does not actually start yet.
The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will flash at the current METRONOME
tempo setting.
Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC]
button again.
4. Start and stop recording.
Same as step 3 – 4 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31.
NOTE
Part button indications
Off: Contains no data
On (green): Contains data
On (red): Part is enabled for
recording
NOTE
Recording capacity
You can record up to a maximum
three songs, or up to a maximum
of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in
each song on the instrument
depending on pedal usage and
other factors.
NOTE
If the metronome was on when
you started recording, you’ll be
able to keep time with the metro-
nome while recording, but the
metronome sound will not be
recorded.
NOTE
If you want to change the time
signature, make sure to change it
before entering Record Ready
mode.
If you want to change the tempo,
reverb type, or effect type when
rerecording a part or when
recording to another part, do so
after entering Record Ready
mode.
The Time Signature of a recorded
song cannot be changed. If you
want to record a song with
another Time Signature, first save
a song to USB storage (see page
37), and delete the recorded
both parts of the song (see page
32, Deleting a selected part), then
set the desired time signature,
and begin a new recording.
NOTE
If you don’t want to hear the previ-
ously recorded part while you
record (for example, when you
want to record a song different
from what you recorded on the
previous part), press the play-
back part button before pressing
the [REC] button so that its indi-
cator is turned off.
For more information on record-
ing, see page 34.
Procedure
Recording Your Performance
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
34
The user song recorder records the following data:
Data in addition to the notes and voices you play is recorded.
This data includes “Individual Parts” and “Entire Song. See below.
Individual Parts
•Notes played
•Voice selection
•[VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340)
•Pedal (Damper/Soft/Sostenuto)
[REVERB] depth
[EFFECT] depth
•Dual mode voices
•Dual balance (F3)
•Dual detune (F3)
•Dual octave shift (F3)
Split mode voices (F4: CLP-370/340)
Split balance (F4: CLP-370/340)
Split octave shift (F4: CLP-370/340)
Entire Song
•Tempo
•Time signature (beat)
[REVERB] type (including OFF)
[EFFECT] type (including OFF)
Recording Your Performance
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
35
Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the
beginning of a song)
The initial settings (data recorded at the beginning of a song) can be changed after the recording.
For example, after recording, you can change the voice to create a different ambience or adjust the
song tempo to your taste.
You can change the following initial settings.
Individual Parts
•Voice selection
•[VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340)
[REVERB] depth
[EFFECT] depth
•Dual mode voices
Split mode voices (CLP-370/340)
Damper/soft pedal depth
Entire Song
•Tempo
[REVERB] type (including OFF)
[EFFECT] type (including OFF)
1. Change the settings via the panel controls.
For example, if you wish to change the recorded voice from [E. PIANO 1] to
[E. PIANO 2], press the [E. PIANO 2] button.
2. Engage Record mode and select a part to change the initial settings.
The indicator glows red. (Data shared by two parts can be changed via either part.)
CAUTION
Be careful not to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button or a key on the keyboard, either
of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the selected part.
3. Press the [REC] button to exit Record mode.
Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
36
Handling Songs with a USB Storage
Device
You can handle User songs (save, load, and delete) with a USB storage
device. You can also format the device or media.
Before using a USB device, read the “Precautions when using the USB TO
DEVICE terminal” section on page 41.
About Save and Load
Save
You can save three User songs in the instrument to the USB storage device as SMF song
files. These songs can be saved to a container” (or memory location) in the USB stor-
age device. 100 containers are available — S00 – S99.
Since the User songs are saved in SMF format, they can be played back on other instru-
ments, including other Clavinovas.
Load
If you want to only play the song in the USB storage device, the following operation is
not necessary. For instructions on playing the song, see “Playing Back User Songs from
a USB Storage Device” on page 45. The Load operation can be used if you want to edit
the recorded song on the instrument. Data can be loaded to User Song 3 (U03).
NOTE
For details on connecting a USB
storage device, see page 73.
NOTE
Before handling songs with a
USB storage device, make sure
that the device is not protected.
If the device is protected, you
cannot access it.
NOTE
If there is not enough capacity left
on the USB storage device to
save or export the data, an appro-
priate message will appear on the
display and you will not be able to
save or export the data. Delete
unwanted files from the device to
make more memory available
(page 39), or use another device.
NOTE
The file numbers which can be
handled in this instrument are 100
files.
SMF song numbers: S00 – S99
User song
(Internal memory)
User Song 1 (U01)
User Song 2 (U02)
User Song 3 (U03)
USB storage device
SMF Song 0 (S00)
SMF Song 1 (S01)
SMF Song 2 (S02)
SMF Song 99 (S99)
Memory location
Save
SMF Song 99 (S99)
NOTE
The “S” indication at the top of the
User file name represents “SMF.”
TERMINOLOGY
SMF (Standard MIDI File):
The SMF (Standard MIDI File)
format is one of the most common
and widely compatible sequence
formats used for storing sequence
data. There are two variations:
Format 0 and Format 1.
A large number of MIDI devices
are compatible with SMF Format 0,
and most commercially available
MIDI sequence data is provided in
SMF Format 0. The SMF format for
sequence files allows you to
exchange song data between
different sequencers. User songs
recorded on the Clavinova are
SMF Format 0.
User song
(Internal memory)
User Song 1 (U01)
User Song 2 (U02)
User Song 3 (U03)
USB storage device
SMF Song 0 (S00)
SMF Song 1 (S01)
SMF Song 2 (S02)
Memory location
Load
SMF Song 99 (S99)
Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
37
Saving a Song
1. Select a User song to save.
Select a User song to save by using the
[SONG SELECT]
and
[–/NO][+/YES]
buttons.
2. Select a song container in the device and save the
User song.
After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, press
the
[FILE]
button (the “SAVE TO USB indicator lights). Then, while holding the
[FILE]
button, simultaneously press the
[–/NO][+/YES]
buttons to select a container
(S00 – S99). After releasing the
[FILE]
button, “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display.
Press the
[+/YES]
button to save the songs. The song is saved into the “USER FILES”
folder and named as “USERSONGxx.MID.
Overwriting the song
If you select a container which contains an SMF song, three dots appear in the
display (ex., “S.0.0.”). If you do not want to overwrite the file, press the [–/NO]
button when “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display and select another container.
If you want to overwrite the song, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in
the display again to confirm whether you wish to overwrite the file or not, press
the [+/YES] button once more.
CAUTION
While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and
Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection:
until the FILE LOAD LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove
the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so
may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
3. Exit from the file operation mode.
Press the [FILE] button several times to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE
indicators turn off.)
Play the recorded song (see page 43).
CAUTION
Do not rename User files on a computer. If the file name is changed in this way, the file
cannot be loaded to the instrument.
CLP
-
370
122 31
Procedure
NOTE
If the selected song has no data,
the song will not be saved (you
cannot select a container for SMF
songs — S00 – S99). Confirm that
the selected song has data by
making sure that the indicator of
[RIGHT] or [LEFT] is turned on.
NOTE
If you move an SMF song from the
“USER FILES” folder to the top
folder using a computer, the file
type will be changed — from a
SMF song (S00 – S99) to an
External song.
Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
38
Loading a Song
CAUTION
If the User file (U03) on the instrument already contains data, this operation can result in
overwriting of the data. Make sure to save important data to your computer beforehand.
1. Select a song container in the device.
After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument,
press the
[FILE] button (the “LOAD TO USER. indicator lights). Then, while
holding the
[FILE] button, press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song
(S00 – S99). Data saved on the instrument can only be loaded back to the
instrument.
2. Load a song to User Song (U03).
“n y” (no/yes) appears in the display. Press the [+/YES] button to load a song.
The file will automatically be loaded into the User Song (U03).
The indication “-” moves from left to right in display, indicating that save oper-
ation is in process.
CAUTION
While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and Format
operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until
the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove
the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so
may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
CAUTION
Do not manually change the file name on the USB storage device by using a computer;
doing so will render the file unplayable or unable for loading on the instrument.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power to the instrument while flashing dashes appear in the display
(indicating the operation is in process). Doing so may damage the data.
When loading is completed, the “End” indication appears in the display, and the
song is loaded into the User Song (U03).
3. Exit from the load operation mode.
Press the [FILE] button to exit the load operation mode. (The “FILE” indicators
turn off.)
CLP
-
370
1 3 1 2
Procedure
Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
39
Deleting Song Files
1. Select a song file to be deleted.
Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, hold the
[FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a file to
be deleted. Two types of files will be displayed in order:
Sxx....... SMF songs
xxx....... External songs (commercially available songs or songs which have
been edited on a computer)
2. Delete the file.
After releasing the [FILE] button, “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display. If you
want to delete the file, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the dis-
play again to confirm whether you wish to delete the file or not, press the
[+/YES] button once more.
If you do not want to delete the song, press the [–/NO] button.
CAUTION
While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and
Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connec-
tion: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT
remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices.
Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
3. Exit from the file operation mode.
Press the [FILE] button to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators
turn off.)
CLP
-
370
1 3 1 2
NOTE
Audition the song to be deleted
before deleting. Songs cannot be
played back after engaging the
Delete mode.
Procedure
NOTE
Only files which contain data will
be displayed.
NOTE
The following types of songs can-
not be deleted. If you try to delete
the song, “Pro” (Protected)
appears in the display.
•Protected songs (extension:
Cxx, Exx or SME)
Disklavier Piano Soft songs
NOTE
For SMF songs (Sxx), the song
numbers are fixed and not
changed by deleting files.
However, the song numbers of
External songs are not fixed and
may be changed by deleting
External songs.
Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
40
Formatting the USB Storage Device
CAUTION
If data is already saved to the USB storage device, be careful not to format it.
If you format the device, all the previously saved data will be deleted.
1. Engage the format mode.
Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/ FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, while
holding the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] but-
tons. When “For” (Format) appears in the display, release the [FILE] button to
display “n y” (no/yes).
2. Execute the format operation.
After “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display, press the [+/YES] button. After n-y”
appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to format the device
or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to format the
device, press the [–/NO] button.
CAUTION
While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format
operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until
the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove
the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so
may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
3. Exit from the format mode.
Press the [FILE] button to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators
turn off.)
CLP
-
370
1 3 1 2
Procedure
ENGLISH
41
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/
Floppy Disk, etc.)
Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE]
terminal
This instrument features a built-in USB [TO DEVICE] ter-
minal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be
sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the
important precautions below.
Compatible USB devices
USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive,
hard disk drive, etc.)
The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-
cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee
operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-
chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please
visit the following web page:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
Connecting USB device
When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE]
terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is
appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction.
CAUTION
When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] termi-
nal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover. If
the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB
device may be damaged.
Using USB Storage Devices
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device,
you can save data you’ve created to the connected device,
as well as read data from the connected device.
The number of USB storage device to be
used
Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal.
Formatting USB storage media
When a USB storage device is connected or media is
inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format
the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation
(page 40).
CAUTION
The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.
Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain
important data.
To protect your data (write-protect)
To prevent important data from being inadvertently
erased, apply the write-protect provided with each stor-
age device or media. If you are saving data to the USB
storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.
Connecting/removing USB storage device
Before removing the media from the device, make sure
that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the
Save, Copy and Delete operations).
CAUTION
Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage
device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing
so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or
hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as dur-
ing Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is
mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection),
do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media
from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device.
Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices.
Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST]
terminal
When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST]
terminal, make sure to observe the following points.
Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting
or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument
freezes, restart the application software or the computer
OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.
CAUTION
Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.
Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] termi-
nal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such
as suspended, sleep, standby).
Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the
computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal.
Execute the following before turning the power to the instru-
ment on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from
the USB [TO HOST] terminal.
- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-
ment. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the key-
board or playing back a song.)
While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should
wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1)
when turning the power of the instrument off then on again,
or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB
cable.
NOTE
For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the
owner’s manual of the USB device.
NOTE
Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot
be used.
NOTE
Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-
ment, they cannot be used for saving data.
ENGLISH
42
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy
Disks
An optional floppy disk drive can be connected to the
USB jack. (CLP-370/340) For instructions on installing
a Yamaha UD-FD01 floppy disk drive, see page 91.
The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve
created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you
to load data from floppy disk to the instrument.
Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive
with care. Follow the important precautions below.
Floppy Disk Compatibility
3.5” 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.
Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks
Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive:
Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward
and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk
slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing
it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject but-
ton pops out.
Removing a Floppy Disk
•After checking that the instrument is not accessing*
the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the
floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at
the upper right of the disk slot all the way in.
When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive.
If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is
stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the
eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and
attempt to eject it again.
* Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as
recording, playback, or deletion of data.
If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is
automatically accessed, since the instrument checks
whether the disk has data.
CAUTION
Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument
itself while the disk is being accessed.
Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk
but also damage to the floppy disk drive.
•Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the
drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and
dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors.
Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/
Write Head
•Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument
employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,
after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of
magnetic particles from the disks used that will even-
tually cause read and write errors.
•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order
Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-
available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head
about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about
the availability of proper head cleaning disks.
About Floppy Disks
Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these
precautions:
•Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply
pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy
disks in their protective cases when they are not in use.
•Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely
high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust
or liquids.
•Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the floppy disk inside.
•Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as
those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,
since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase
data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.
Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
•Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached
in the proper location.
To Protect Your Data (Write-pro-
tect Tab):
•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide
the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position
(tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s
write-protect tab is set to the overwrite position (tab
closed).
NOTE
Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other
objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks.
Write-protect tab open
(protect position)
Playing Back Songs
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
43
Playing Back Songs
You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (pages 30 – 35) or commercially avail-
able songs. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback.
The Demo Songs ....................................................................................... page 16
Playing the voice demo tune.
50 Piano Preset Songs .............................................................................. page 17
50 Piano Preset Songs in the instrument.
User songs in the instrument .................................................................... page 44
User songs which you recorded to the instrument by using the record function (pages
30 – 35).
External songs in the instrument .............................................................. page 44
Songs transferred from a computer (including commercially available songs and
songs which have been edited on a computer). Songs can be transferred (saved) to
the instrument by using the Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included
“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). The songs are saved to an area of the
internal memory separate from the area for recorded User songs. Up to 255 songs can
be played back on this instrument (numbers 001 – 255).
User Songs saved from the instrument in the USB storage device.......... page 45
SMF songs which have been saved from the instrument to a USB storage device (page
37).
External songs in the USB storage device................................................. page 45
Commercially available songs or songs which have been edited on a computer, etc.
and stored to a USB storage device. Up to 999 songs can be played back on this
instrument (numbers 001 – 999).
Internet songs from the website (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)........... page 46
Connect the instrument to the Internet and play back from the Internet.
Sequence formats that can be played
SMF (Standard MIDI File) Formats 0 and 1
The SMF format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence for-
mats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format
1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most
commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. The SMF
format for sequence files allows you to exchange song data between different
sequencers. User songs recorded in this instrument are saved as SMF Format 0.
ESEQ
This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including
the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various
Yamaha software.
Among ESEQ files, Disklavier Piano Soft songs can be played back on this instru-
ment.
NOTE
When playing back songs con-
taining various voices or parts
(such as XG or GM songs), the
voices may not sound correct or
as intended on the original. You
may be able to remedy this and
make the playback sound more
natural or appropriate by chang-
ing the Song Channel Selection
setting (page 66) to “1&2,” so that
only channels 1 and 2 will play
back.
NOTE
If the song cannot be selected or
loaded, you may need to change
the Character Code setting (page
70).
NOTE
Song data is not transmitted via
the MIDI connections. However,
channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier
Piano Soft songs and non-pro-
tected External songs will be
transmitted via the MIDI connec-
tions when the Song Channel
Selection is set to “1&2” (page
66).
NOTE
For the USB storage device,
folder directories on this instru-
ment can be recognized up to
two levels. However, the level is
not displayed and song numbers
001 – 999 are displayed which-
ever level the song contains.
NOTE
If the metronome is being used
during playback, the metronome
will automatically stop when play-
back is stopped.
NOTE
If the REVERB type is changed
via the panel controls during play-
back, both the playback and key-
board reverb effects will be
changed.
NOTE
If the EFFECT type is changed via
the panel controls during play-
back, the playback effect may be
switched off in some cases.
Playing Back Songs
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
44
Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument
1. Select the desired song.
Press the [SONG SELECT] button (the USER indicator lights). Then press the
[–/NO] [+/YES] buttons to select a song. The User songs are displayed as “Uxx*”
and External songs in the instrument are displayed as “xxx.
*The “U” indication in the User song name means “User. The letters “xx” represent the song number.
2. Start playback.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
The current measure number appears on the display during playback.
•You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You
can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by select-
ing a voice from the panel.
Adjust the volume
Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume.
Adjust the tempo
You can use the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to adjust the playback
tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s
original tempo) is set when you press the
[] and [] buttons simultaneously.
3. Stop playback.
When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the
top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG
[STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/
PAUSE]
button.
CLP
-
370
1123
Procedure
NOTE
User song playback cannot be
started when the recorder contains
no data.
NOTE
You can also enjoy playing duets
with yourself by recording one
part of a duet or a song for two
pianos, then playing the other
part while the recorded part plays
back.
NOTE
If you have External songs in the
instrument, you can use the
repeat function.
ALL: Play all External songs in
sequence.
rnd: Play all External songs con-
tinuously in random order.
NOTE
For instructions about how to load
the songs from the computer
(refer on page 76).
Playing Back Songs
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
45
Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device
1. Select the desired song in the USB storage device.
After making sure that the device is connected to the instrument, press the
[SONG SELECT] button (the USB indicator lights). Then press the [–/NO] [+/
YES]
buttons to select a number of the song you want to play (the number will
appear on the LED display “Sxx*” or “xxx*”), or select the playing method
RND* or ALL*.
*The “S” indication in the display represents “SMF” songs. The letters “xx” represent the song number.
*The “xxx” indication in the display represents External songs.
RND (r n d)*: Play all preset songs continuously in random order.
ALL*: Play all preset songs in sequence.
2. Start and stop playback.
Same as steps 2 and 3 in “Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument”
on page 44.
Useful Playback Functions
Turning part playback on and off
When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for parts that contain data
(one of [RIGHT] [LEFT] or both) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or
stopped, pressing these part buttons turns off the indicators, and the data on those
parts is not played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off.
Starting playback automatically when you start playing the keyboard
(Sync Start)
You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the
“Sync Start” function.
To engage the Sync Start function, press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button while hold-
ing down the SONG [STOP] button. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] lamp will flash at the
current tempo.
(Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.)
Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard.
This function is useful when you wish to match the timing of the beginning of the play-
back sound and the start of your own performance.
Assigning the PLAY/PAUSE function to the left pedal
The left pedal can also be assigned to song play/pause operation via the “Left Pedal
Mode” (page 66). This is convenient for starting playback of the song anytime after you
have started playing.
CLP
-
370
112
Procedure
NOTE
Parts can be turned on or off
before or during playback.
TERMINOLOGY
Sync:
Synchronized; occurring at the
same time
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
46
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/
340, CLP-S308/S306)
This feature lets you directly connect your instrument to the Internet. A service in the special Yamaha website enables you
to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music.
Here in this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communi-
cations. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the “Glossary of Internet Terms” on page 57.
Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection
You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber,
cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For the latest ser-
vices and the specific instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible
devices etc.), refer to the Yamaha website:
http://music.yamaha.com/idc/
To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or
provider.
Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem with-
out router)
NOTE
Depending on the Internet con-
nection, you may not be able to
connect to two or more devices
(for example, a computer and the
instrument), depending on the
contract with the provider. This
means you cannot connect with
the instrument. If in doubt, check
your contract or contact your pro-
vider.
NOTE
Connect the LAN cable to the
[LAN] port.
NOTE
Some types of modems require
an optional Ethernet hub network
for simultaneously connecting to
several devices (such as com-
puter, musical instrument, etc.).
NOTE
Due to EU regulations, users
within Europe should use an STP
(shielded twisted pair) cable to
prevent electromagnetic interfer-
ence.
Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument,
since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself.
Modem*
No router capability
Router
Cable type
LAN cable
LAN cable
[LAN] port
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
47
Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with
router)
Connection example 3: Wireless connection (using a wireless game
adaptor)
Connection example 4: Wireless connection (using a USB wireless
LAN adaptor)
NOTE
Connect the LAN cable to the
[LAN] port.
Modem*
Router capability
LAN cable
LAN cable
[LAN] port
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
NOTE
Connect the wireless game adap-
tor to the [LAN] port.
NOTE
In addition to the modem or an
access point, this connection
requires a router.
Modem*
Access point
[LAN] port
Wireless Game Adaptor
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
NOTE
Connect the USB wireless LAN
adaptor to the USB [TO DEVICE]
terminal.
NOTE
In addition to the modem or an
access point, this connection
requires a router.
NOTE
This instrument is encrypted in
WEP format only.
Modem* Access point
USB Wireless LAN Adaptor
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal
* Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem.
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
48
Connecting the Instrument to the Internet
If you are using a connection by cable (using DHCP):
You do not need to make settings on the instrument. You can access the Internet simply
by connecting a router or a modem equipped with a router to the instrument via a LAN
cable.
Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel
will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG
SELECT]
button.
You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing
back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56.
If you are using a connection by cable (using static IP
address, proxy server):
You need to make Internet settings on the instrument.
For instructions on making Internet settings, see About the Internet Settings” on page 49.
If you are using a wireless LAN (using a wireless
game adaptor):
You do not need to make settings on the instrument.
You can access the Internet simply by connecting a wireless game adaptor to the instrument.
* The wireless game adaptor requires settings such as the access point. For information about how to make
settings, read the owner’s manual for the product you are using.
Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel
will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG
SELECT]
button.
You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing
back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56.
If you are using a wireless LAN (using a USB wireless
LAN adaptor):
You need to make Internet settings from a computer; settings cannot be made on the
instrument.
For instructions on making Internet settings, see About the Internet Settings” on page 49.
NOTE
The most common routers and
modems equipped with a router
have a DHCP function.
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
49
About the Internet Settings
You can conveniently make Internet settings for your instrument from the special
Yamaha website.
If you select a wireless connection using the USB wireless LAN adaptor or a connection
by cable (using static IP address or proxy server), you need to make Internet settings
explained as follows.
Internet Settings
When you use the Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the first time, you should
make the Internet settings according to the following illustration flow.
This flow is shown to make you easily understand how to load the setting file created by
the computer to your instrument. By following this flow, you won’t need to make
difficult settings such as typing various data on your instrument.
For details, refer to the Yamaha webpage:
http://music.yamaha.com/idc/
Creating the Internet Setting Files
You need to create the Internet setting files on the special Yamaha webpage using your
computer before making the Internet settings.
For information about how to create the Internet setting files, read the instructions on
the Yamaha webpage:
http://music.yamaha.com/idc/
Loading the Internet Setting Files
This procedure lets you make Internet settings by loading the Internet setting files
created on the special Yamaha webpage to the instrument.
1. Engage the Function mode.
Make sure that the USB flash memory device containing the saved Internet
setting file named config.n21” is connected to the instrument, and then press
the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the [FUNCTION] indicator lights.
NOTE
You do not need to make the
Internet settings here if you are
using a connection by cable
(using DHCP) or a wireless LAN
(using a wireless game adaptor).
Create the Internet
setting file
Save the file
to USB flash
memory
USB Flash
Memory
Load the file to
the instrument
Access the
special Yamaha
website
NOTE
The Internet settings will be
backed up.
CLP
-
370
125 4
53
NOTE
You can create the Internet
setting files (named “config.n21”)
on the special Yamaha webpage.
NOTE
The Load mode cannot be
engaged while voice demo song
playback is in use, when the
[REC] button is on, or when user
song playback is active.
Procedure
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
50
2. Select Function F9.y (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.y
(on the CLP-S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.y (CLP-370/
340) or F8.y (CLP-S308/S306).
3. Enter the Sub-modes Selection mode following the
F9 or F8.
Press the [+/YES] button to enter the Sub-modes Selection mode.
4. Select Function F9.1 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.1
(on the CLP-S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.1 (CLP-370/
340) or F8.1 (CLP-S308/S306).
If you do not want to load the file, press the [–/NO] button.
5. Start loading.
Press the [+/YES] button.
After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to load the
file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more.
If you do not want to load the file, press the [–/NO] button.
When loading from the USB flash memory device is
completed, an “End” message will appear on the dis-
play. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this
display.
Once loading is completed, you are now ready to access the Internet.
Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected
channel will be shown on the display when you select “INTERNET” lamp with
the [SONG SELECT] button.
For instructions on listening to the songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Inter-
net” on page 56.
NOTE
If loading is not successfully com-
pleted, an “Err” message and the
error code will appear alternately
on the display.
To return to the previous indica-
tion, press the [–/NO] or
[+/YES] button.
NOTE
Error Code
You can check the description for
the error code on the Yamaha
website:
http://music.yamaha.com/idc/
NOTE
Yamaha recommends that you
back up the Internet setting files
(page 78).
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
51
Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless
LAN adaptor)
You can check the field strength on the display, if you are using a USB wireless LAN
adaptor (Connection example 4 on page 47).
Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-
modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).
1. Select Function F9.3 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.3
(on the CLP-S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.3 (CLP-370/
340) or F8.3 (CLP-S308/S306).
2. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button
The field strength indication will appear on the display for about three seconds.
Field Strength Indications
NOTE
The field strength can be dis-
played after making the Internet
connection.
NOTE
If you are using a wireless game
adaptor, the display pattern for
“No wireless LAN is used” will
appear.
Procedure
Radio Status Display
No signal is present.
Field strength: Weak
Field strength: Medium
Field strength: Strong
No wireless LAN is used.
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
52
Exporting the Connection Information
This procedure lets you export the detailed information on the current connection as a
text file to a USB flash memory device. You can check the information on your com-
puter.
Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-
modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).
1. Select Function F9.2 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.2
(on the CLP-S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.2 (CLP-370/
340) or F8.2 (CLP-S308/S306).
2. Turn on the Export mode.
Press the [+/YES] buttons so that “OUt appears on the display.
If you do not want to export the file, press the [–/NO]
button.
3. Start exporting.
Press the [+/YES] button.
A n y” appears in the display to confirm whether you wish to export the file or
not, press the [+/YES] button again.
If you do not want to export the file, press the [–/NO] button.
A “n
y” message will appear on the display if a USB flash memory device con-
tains a file with the same name as the one you are attempting to export.
Press the [+/YES] button to execute the overwriting operation. Press the [–/NO]
button to cancel exporting.
When exporting to the USB flash memory device is
completed, an “End” message will appear on the dis-
play. Press
[–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this
display.
After exporting, connect the USB flash memory device to your computer, and
then open the text file named “ConnectionInfo.txt” in the root directory of the
USB flash memory device to check the detailed connection information.
NOTE
The connection information file
does not allow you to manually
make Internet settings. The con-
nection information file is set to
“read only” and cannot be edited.
Procedure
NOTE
The export mode cannot be
engaged while voice demo song
playback is in use, when the
[REC] button is on, or when user
song playback is active.
NOTE
If exporting has not successfully
been completed, an “Err” mes-
sage and the error code will
appear alternately on the display.
NOTE
Error Code
You can check the description for
the error code on the Yamaha
website:
http://music.yamaha.com/idc/
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
53
Other Internet Operations
Checking the version number of the instrument
You can check the version number of this instrument.
Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-
modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).
1. Select Function [F9.4] (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.4 (on the CLP-
S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.4 (CLP-
370/340) or F8.4 (CLP-S308/S306).
2. Call up the version number.
Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display.
A “PrG message and version number “x.xx” will appear alternately on the
display.
3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode
Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the sub-modes.
4. Exit from the Function mode
Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from function modes.
Checking the version number of the LAN Port driver
You can check the version number of the LAN Port driver.
Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-
modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).
1. Select Function F9.5 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.5 (on the CLP-
S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.5 (CLP-
370/340) or F8.5 (CLP-S308/S306).
2. Call up the version number.
Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display.
A “L-P” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the
display.
3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode
Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes.
4. Exit from function mode
Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes.
Procedure
Procedure
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
54
Checking the version number of the USB-LAN
Adapter driver
You can check the version number of the USB-LAN Adapter driver.
Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-
modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).
1. Select Function F9.6 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.6 (on the CLP-
S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.6 (CLP-
370/340) or F8.6 (CLP-S308/S306).
2. Call up the version number.
Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display.
A “L-A message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the
display.
3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode
Press the
[+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes.
4. Exit from function mode
Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes.
Procedure
Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
55
Initializing Internet Settings
You can initialize the Internet settings.
Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Sub-
modes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49).
1. Select Function F9.7 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.7 (on the CLP-
S308/S306).
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select Function F9.7 (CLP-
370/340) or F8.7 (CLP-S308/S306).
2. Enter the Initializing mode.
Press the [+/YES] buttons.
A “CLr” message will appear on the display.
3. Confirm the initialization.
Press the [+/YES] button.
A n y” appears in the display to confirm whether you wish to initialize or
not.
If you do not want to initialize, press the [–/NO] button.
4. Execute the initialization.
Press again the [+/YES] buttons.
Start the initialization.
When initialization is completed, an “End” message appears on the display.
5. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode
Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes.
6. Exit from function mode
Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes.
CAUTION
Initializing restores the instrument to the factory-programmed settings for all Internet
settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the Internet settings before initial-
izing.
Internet Initial Settings List
The following are the default settings of this instrument.
NOTE
The settings of the Internet are not
initialized when using the “Initial-
izing the data” on page 58.
Procedure
NOTE
Information of the cookies will be
initialized at the same time.
DHCP ON (available)
Wireless LAN OFF (no settings)
Proxy server OFF (no settings)
Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
56
Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-
370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
Yamaha provides a special website with data service that enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various
musical genres as background music on your instrument.
Before connect the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read “Internet Direct Connection on page 46.
1. Turn on the “INTERNET” lamp.
Make sure that the instrument is connected to the Internet, then press the
[SONG SELECT] button (the INTERNET indicator lights). The “INTERNET”
access lamp flashes in red during Internet access.
2. Change the Channel.
Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to change the channel. The current channel
setting appears on the display.
3. Start playback.
Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback (the “INTERNET”
access lamp flashes in red during Internet access).
4. Stop playback.
Press the SONG [STOP] button.
CLP
-
370
134
2
Procedure
NOTE
You cannot select the “INTER-
NET” lamp while voice demo
song playback is in use or the
[REC] button is on.
NOTE
The LED displays shown in this
owner’s manual are for instruc-
tional purposes only and may
appear somewhat different from
those on your instrument.
NOTE
You can adjust the Effect Type
(page 23) that is applied to the
voice you play on the keyboard
as well as for the song on Internet
playback. The Touch sensitivity
(page 24) for the keyboard voice
can also be adjusted to your lik-
ing. You can also change the Bril-
liance type (page 22) and Reverb
type (page 22) that are applied to
Internet song playback.
NOTE
When you select a different song
(or a different song is selected
during chained playback), an
appropriate Reverb Type will be
selected accordingly.
NOTE
Song data from the Internet is not
transmitted via the MIDI connec-
tors.
NOTE
The Synchro start function, Part
settings and A-B Repeat function
becomes effective after you play
back the song once.
Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
57
Glossary of Internet Terms
Access point
A device that acts as a communication hub for multiple wireless devices, and conventionally enables both
wired and wireless LAN connections.
Broadband
An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, high-
volume data communication.
Browser
The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display
that shows the contents of the web pages.
Cookie
A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Inter-
net. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” cer-
tain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each
time you visit the site.
DHCP
This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information
can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet.
Download
Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other
local storage device—much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument,
this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument.
Home page
The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to
mean the “front screen” or top page of a website.
Internet
A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile
phones and other devices.
IP address
A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location
on the network.
LAN
Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single
location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable.
Link
Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a
web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link.
Modem
A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It
converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa.
Provider
A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is
necessary to contract to a provider.
Proxy
A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing informa-
tion on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests
itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and
speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network.
Router
A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting
several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is
usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router.
Server
A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services.
Site
Short for “website, this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection
of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site.
SSL
Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over
the Internet.
URL
Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and
pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.
Web page
Refers to each individual page that makes up a website.
WEP
Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, a security protocol for wireless networks. WEP protects communication
contents from being intercepted.
Wireless LAN
A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection.
Wireless Game
Adaptor (Wireless
Ethernet Converter
or Bridge)
Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game
machines, etc. equipped with
[LAN] ports.
Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
58
Initializing the data
CAUTION
When you initialize the data, all panel settings and song data will be erased and reset to
the default settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the data before initial-
izing (refer on page 78).
Turn off the power to the instrument. Then turn the power on
while holding the C7 key (highest key).
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power to this instrument while data in internal memory is being ini-
tialized (in other words, while the “CLr” indication is shown). Doing so may corrupt the
all data on the instrument.
Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
59
Detailed Settings [FUNCTION]
You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch or selecting a
scale, etc.
The following parameters are available.
The CLP-370/340 has nine main functions, and the CLP-330 has seven main functions, and the CLP-S308/S306 has eight
main functions.
Some of these main functions consist of a set of sub-modes.
Parameter List
Function Sub-Mode
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330
CLP-S308/
S306
Reference
page
Fine tuning of the pitch
—F1F1F162
Selecting a scale
Scale F2.1 F2.1 F2.1 63
Base Note F2.2 F2.2 F2.2 63
Dual mode functions
Dual Balance F3.1 F3.1 F3.1 64
Dual Detune F3.2 F3.2 F3.2 64
Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.3 F3.3 F3.3 64
Voice 2 Octave Shift F3.4 F3.4 F3.4 64
Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.5 F3.5 F3.5 64
Voice 2 Effect Depth F3.6 F3.6 F3.6 64
Reset F3.7 F3.7 F3.7 64
Split mode functions
Split Point F4.1 65
Split Balance F4.2 65
Right Voice Octave Shift F4.3 65
Left Voice Octave Shift F4.4 65
Right Voice Effect Depth F4.5 65
Left Voice Effect Depth F4.6 65
Damper Pedal Range F4.7 65
Reset F4.8 65
Other Functions
Left Pedal Mode F5.1 F4.1 F4.1 66
Soft Pedal Effect Depth F5.2 F4.2 F4.2 66
Sustain Sample Depth F5.3 66
Keyoff Sample Volume F5.4 66
Song Channel Selection F5.5 F4.3 F4.3 66
Metronome volume
F6 F5 F5 67
MIDI Functions
MIDI Transmit Channel Selection F7.1 F6.1 F6.1 67
MIDI Receive Channel Selection F7.2 F6.2 F6.2 68
Local Control ON/OFF F7.3 F6.3 F6.3 68
Program Change ON/OFF F7.4 F6.4 F6.4 68
Control Change ON/OFF F7.5 F6.5 F6.5 68
Panel/Status Transmit F7.6 F6.6 F6.6 69
Initial Setup Send F7.7 F6.7 F6.7 69
Backup Functions
Voice F8.1 F7.1 F7.1 70
MIDI F8.2 F7.2 F7.2 70
Tuning F8.3 F7.3 F7.3 70
Others F8.4 F7.4 F7.4 70
Character Code
F8.5 F7.5 F7.5 70
Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
60
Basic Procedure in Function Mode
Follow the steps below to use the functions.
(If you become lost while using a function, return to this page and read the basic procedure.)
1. Engage the Function mode.
Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its [FUNCTION] indicator lights.
will appear on the display. (The indication of varies depending on
the status of the unit and usage.)
2. Select a function.
Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select the desired function from
F1 – F9 (CLP-370/340), F1 – F7 (CLP-330), F1 – F8 (CLP-S308/S306).
3. Use the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons.
If the function does not include sub-modes, jump to Step 4.
If the function includes sub-modes, press the [+/YES] button once to enter the
respective sub-mode.
LAN Settings
Loading Internet Setting File F9.1 F8.1 49
Exporting The Connection Informa-
tion
F9.2 F8.2 52
Checking the Field Strength F9.3 F8.3 51
Program Version
Program Version F9.4 F8.4 53
LAN Functions
LAN port driver version F9.5 F8.5 53
USB-LAN Adapter version F9.6 F8.6 54
Initializing Internet Settings F9.7 F8.7 55
Function Sub-Mode
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330
CLP-S308/
S306
Reference
page
CLP
-
370
3 4
1245
Procedure
NOTE
Functions cannot be selected
during Demo/Song Select/ file
operation mode or when the user
song recorder is in operation.
NOTE
To exit the Function mode, press
[FUNCTION] button any time.
NOTE
After you select the function, the
current setting will be displayed
when the [–/NO] or [+/YES] but-
ton is pressed for the first time.
Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
61
4. Operate the desired function using the following
two buttons.
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ]
Selects the desired function/sub-mode.
[–/NO] or [+/YES]
After you select the desired function or sub-mode, set the ON/OFF, select the
type, or change the value, accordingly.
Depending on the setting, the default setting (which is used when you first turn
on the power to the Clavinova) is recalled by pressing the [–/NO] and [+/YES]
buttons simultaneously.
Operation Example 1 (F1. Fine tuning of the pitch)
Operation Example 2 (F3.1 “Dual Balance”)
5.
After using the function, exit the function mode.
To exit the Function mode, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its
[TEMPO] indicator lights.
Engage the Function mode.
LED indication
Change the value.
LED indication
Select a desired function.
Engage the Function mode. Select a desired function.
LED indication
Engage the respective
sub-mode.
Select a desired sub-mode.
LED indication
Change the value.
LED indication
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
62
About Each Function
You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument.
This function is useful when you play the Clavinova
along with other instruments or CD music.
1. Engage the Function mode and select .
2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or
raise the pitch of the A3 key in approximately
0.2 Hz increments.
The value appears two-digit number and one decimal
place.
Ex. 440.2Hz is shown as 40.2 on the display.
F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch
Display Value
440.0
Setting range:
440.2
427.0 – 453.0 (Hz)
440.4
Normal setting:
440.6
440.0 (Hz)
440.8
TERMINOLOGY
Hz (Hertz):
This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and
represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second.
NOTE
You can also use the keyboard to set the pitch (in any mode
other than Function mode).
To tune up (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0
keys (three white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press
any key between C3 and B3.
To tune down (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and
C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and
press any key between C3 and B3.
To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1,B -1, C0 and C#0
(three white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press any
key between C3 and B3.
Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest (farthest left)
key on the keyboard corresponds to A -1, and the highest
(farthest right) key to C7.
During the procedure described above, the display indicates a
value in Hz < >. After the procedure, the display
returns to the previous indication.
NOTE
You can also tune in about 1Hz steps (in any mode other
than Function mode).
To tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz
increments:
Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at
the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a
black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button.
To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys
(three white keys at the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two
white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO]
[+/YES] buttons simultaneously.
During the procedure described above, the display indicates a
value in Hz < >. After the procedure, the display
returns to the previous indication.
A -1
A#-1
B -1
C0
C#0
C3 B3
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
63
You can select various scales.
Equal Temperament is the most common
contemporary piano tuning scale. However,
history has known numerous other scales,
many of which serve as the basis for certain
genres of music. You can experience these
tunings with
the Clavinova.
Equal Temperament
One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals.
Currently the most popular piano tuning scale.
Pure Major/Pure Minor
Based on natural overtones, three major chords using
these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound.
Pythagorean
This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher,
is based on the interval of a perfect 5th.
The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beauti-
ful and suitable for some leads.
Mean Tone
This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that
the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. The scale
became popular during the late 16th century through the
late 18th century, and was used by Handel.
Werckmeister/Kirnberger
These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in
different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the
impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in
the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are often used today
to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords.
1. Engage the Function mode and select .
2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale
function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/
FUNCTION , ] buttons to select the
desired sub-mode.
Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select
the number of the desired tuning.
Sub-mode
F2.1: Scale
Setting range: 1: Equal Temperament
2: Pure Major
3: Pure Minor
4: Pythagorean
5: Mean Tone
6: Werckmeister
7: Kirnberger
Normal setting: 1: Equal Temperament
F2.2: Base Note
If you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, you
need to specify the root. (You can specify the root note
with Equal Temperament selected, but it is not effective.
The base note setting is effective for tunings other than
the Equal Temperament tuning.)
Setting range:
Normal setting:
•Root indication example
F2. Selecting a Scale
(F
) (G) (A
)
followed by
a high bar if sharp
followed by
a low bar if flat
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
64
You can set various parameters for Dual mode
to optimize the settings for the songs you play,
such as adjusting the volume balance between
two voices.
Dual mode function settings are set individu-
ally for each voice combination.
1. Select the voices in Dual mode, then engage
the Function mode and select .
2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Dual
mode function’s sub-mode, then use the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select
the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/
YES] button to assign values.
Sub-mode
F3.1: Dual Balance
Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an
equal balance between the two Dual
mode voices. Settings below “10”
increase the volume of Voice 2 in
relation to Voice 1, and settings
above “10” increase the volume of
Vo ic e 1 in relation to Voice 2.)
Normal setting:
Different for each voice combination.
You can set one voice as the main voice, and another
voice as a softer, mixed voice.
F3.2: Dual Detune
Setting range: -20 – 0 – 20 (With positive values,
the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the
pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With neg-
ative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is
lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is
raised.)
Normal setting:
Different for each voice combination.
Detune Voice 1 and Voice 2 for Dual mode to create a
thicker sound.
F3.3: Voice 1 Octave Shift
F3.4: Voice 2 Octave Shift
Setting range: –1, 0, 1
Normal setting:
Different for each voice combination.
You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for
Vo ice 1 and Voice 2 independently. Depending on which
voices you combine in Dual mode, the combination may
sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an
octave.
F3.5: Voice 1 Effect Depth
F3.6: Voice 2 Effect Depth
Setting range: 0 – 20
Normal setting:
Different for each voice combination.
These functions make it possible to individually set the
depth of the effect for Voices 1 and 2 for Dual mode.
(The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the
[EFFECT] is ON. Function mode must be exited before
the [EFFECT] can be turned ON.)
•“Vo ice 1” and “Voice 2” are explained on page 26.
F3.7: Reset
This function resets all Dual mode functions to their
default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values.
F3. Dual Mode Functions
NOTE
If Dual mode is not engaged, will appear instead of
and you will be unable to select Dual mode functions.
In this case, you can switch to the Dual mode by selecting two
voices.
NOTE
The available setting range is wider in the lower range (± 60 cents
for A -1), and narrower in the higher range (± 5 cents for C7). (100
cents equal one semitone.)
NOTE
SHORTCUT:
You can jump directly to the Dual mode functions by pressing
the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the two Dual mode
voice buttons.
To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION]
button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
65
This menu enables you to make various
detailed settings for Split mode.
By changing the split point or other setting,
you can optimize the settings for the songs
you play.
1. Select the voices in Split mode, then engage
the Function mode and select .
2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Split
mode function’s sub-mode, then use the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select
the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/
YES] button to assign values.
Sub-mode
F4.1: Split Point
Setting range: The entire keyboard
Normal setting: F
2
Set the point on the keyboard that separates the right and
left-hand sections (split point). The pressed key is
included in the left-hand range.
•Instead of pressing the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons, you
can engage the split point by pressing the appropriate
key on the keyboard.
•If Function mode is not engaged, you can change the
split point to any other key by pressing the key while
holding the [SPLIT] button (page 27).
•An example of a key name indication for a split point
F4.2: Split Balance
Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an
equal balance between the two Split
mode voices. Settings below “10”
increase the volume of the left voice
in relation to the right voice, and set-
tings above “10” increase the volume
of the right voice in relation to the
left voice.)
Normal setting: Different for each voice combina-
tion.
The volume level of the two voices combined in Split
mode can be adjusted as required. You can make this
setting for each combination of voices individually.
F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift
F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift
Setting range: –1, 0, 1
Normal setting: Different for each voice combination
You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for
the Right Voice and Left Voice independently. Make a
setting depending on the note range of the songs you
play. You can make this setting for each combination of
voices individually.
F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth
F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth
Setting range: 0 – 20
Normal setting: Different for each voice combination
These functions make it possible to individually set the
depth of the effect for the left and right Split mode
voices.
The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the
[EFFECT] is ON. You must exit Function mode before
you can turn on an [EFFECT].
You can make this setting for each combination of voices
individually.
F4.7: Damper Pedal Range
Setting range: ALL (for both voices)
1 (for the right Voice)
2 (for the left Voice)
Normal setting: ALL
The Damper Pedal Range function determines whether
the damper pedal affects the right voice, the left voice, or
both the left and right voices in Split mode.
F4.8: Reset
This function resets all Split mode functions to their
default values. Press the
[+/YES] button to reset the val-
ues.
F4. (CLP-370/340)
Split Mode Functions
NOTE
If Split mode is not engaged, will appear instead of
and you will be unable to select Split mode functions. Also note
that you must exit Function mode before you can engage Split
mode.
(F
2) (G2)
followed by
a high bar if sharp
followed by
a low bar if flat
NOTE
SHORTCUT:
You can jump directly to Split mode functions by pressing the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the [SPLIT] button.
To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNC-
TION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
66
This section provides a variety of other functions,
including letting you assign the operation of the
left pedal to one of several modes, and allowing
you to select specific song channels for playback.
1. Engage the Function mode and select
(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-
330).
2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the other
functions’ sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/
FUNCTION, ] buttons to select the desired
sub-mode.
Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to select
the desired pedal function or assign the values.
Sub-mode
F5.1
(CLP-370/340)/F4.1 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Left Pedal Mode
Setting range:
1. Soft Pedal
The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly
changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is
pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are
already playing.
2. Song Play/Pause
This mode allows you to start or pause song playback.
In this mode, the Left Pedal functions in the same
manner as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the
panel.
3. Variation (CLP-370/340)
This mode enables you to switch the Voices variation
on or off. In this mode, the left pedal functions in the
same manner as the [VARIATION] button on the
panel.
Normal setting: 1 (Soft Pedal)
F5.2 (CLP-370/340)/F4.2 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Soft Pedal Effect Depth
Setting range: 1 – 5
Normal setting: 3
This function sets the depth of the soft pedal effect.
F5.3
(CLP-370/340)
Sustain Sample Depth
Setting range: 0 – 20
Normal setting: 12
The GRAND PIANO 1
voice features special “Sustain
Samples” that recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic
grand pianos soundboard and strings when the
damper
pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of
this effect.
F5.4 (CLP-370/340)
Keyoff Sample Volume
Setting range: 0 – 20
Normal setting: 10
You can adjust the volume of the keyoff sound (the sub-
tle sound produced when the keys are released) for voices
[GRAND PIANO1], [HARPSICHORD], [E.CLAVICHORD]
(including their variations).
F5.5 (CLP-370/340)/F4.3 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Song Channel Selection
Setting range: ALL, 1&2
Normal setting: ALL
The setting here only affects Disklavier Piano Soft songs,
and non-protected External songs. You can specify which
song channels will play back on this instrument. When
ALL is selected, channels 1 – 16 will be played back.
When “1&2” is selected, only channels 1 and 2 will be
played back, while channels 3 – 16 will be transmitted via
MIDI.
F5.
(CLP-370/340)
/ F4.
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Other Functions
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
67
You can change the volume of the metronome
sound.
Use this function to adjust the metronome vol-
ume.
1. Engage the Function mode and select
(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-
330).
2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the
metronome volume as required.
Setting range: 1 – 20
Normal setting: 10
You can make detailed adjustments to MIDI
settings.
For more information about MIDI, see the
“About MIDI” section (page 72).
1. Engage the Function mode and select
(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-
330).
2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI
function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/
FUNCTION , ] buttons to select the
desired sub-mode.
Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to set a
selected parameter.
Sub-mode
F7.1:
(CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
MIDI Transmit Channel Selection
In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the
transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched
for proper data transfer.
This parameter enables you to specify the channel on
which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.
Setting range: 1 – 16, OFF (not transmitted)
Normal setting: 1
F6.
(CLP-370/340)
/ F5.
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Metronome Volume
NOTE
SHORTCUT:
You can jump directly to the metronome functions (CLP-370/
340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) by pressing the [TEMPO/
FUNCTION] button while holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button.
To exit the Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/
FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up.
F7.
(CLP-370/340)
/ F6.
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
MIDI Functions
All MIDI settings described below will affect the MIDI signal
in and out of the USB [TO HOST] connector.
NOTE
In Dual mode, Voice 1 data is transmitted on its specified channel.
In Split mode (CLP-370/340), right voice data is transmitted on its
specified channel. In Dual mode, Voice 2 data is transmitted on the
next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In
Split mode (CLP-370/340), left voice data is transmitted on the next
greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In either
mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF.”
NOTE
Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connections. However,
channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier Piano Soft songs, and non-protected
External songs will be transmitted via the MIDI connections depend-
ing on the Song Channel Selection setting (page 66).
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
68
F7.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
MIDI Receive Channel Selection
In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the
transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched
for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to
specify the channel on which the Clavinova receives
MIDI data.
Setting range: ALL, 1&2, 1 – 16
Normal setting: ALL
F7.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Local Control ON/OFF
“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the key-
board controls its internal tone generator, allowing the
internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard.
This situation is “Local Control On, since the internal
tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard.
Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the
keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the
appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the
MIDI OUT terminal when notes are played on the key-
board. At the same time, the internal tone generator
responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN
terminal.
Setting range: ON/OFF
Normal setting: ON
F7.4: (CLP-370/340)/F7.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Program Change ON/OFF
Normally the instrument will respond to MIDI program
change numbers received from an external keyboard or
other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly-num-
bered voice to be selected on the corresponding channel
(the keyboard voice does not change). The instrument
will normally also send a MIDI program change number
whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the corre-
spondingly-numbered voice or program to be selected
on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to
receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers.
This function makes it possible to cancel program
change number reception and transmission so that
voices can be selected on the instrument without affect-
ing the external MIDI device.
Setting range: ON/OFF
Normal setting: ON
F7.5: (CLP-370/340)/F7.5: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Control Change ON/OFF
Normally the CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will
respond to MIDI control change data received from an
external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on
the corresponding channel to be affected by pedal and
other control” settings received from the controlling
device (the keyboard voice is not affected).
The CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 also transmits
MIDI control change information when the pedal or
other appropriate controls are operated.
This function makes it possible to cancel control change
data reception and transmission so that, for example, the
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306’s pedal and other
controls can be operated without affecting an external
MIDI device.
Setting range: ON/OFF
Normal setting: ON
NOTE
ALL:
“Multi-timbre” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception of
different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, enabling the Clavinova to
play multi-channel song data received from F7.6 (CLP-370/340)/
F6.6 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) or sequencer.
1&2:
“1&2” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception on chan-
nels 1 and 2 only, enabling the Clavinova to play 1 and 2 channel
song data received from a music computer or sequencer.
NOTE
Program change and other like channel messages received will not
affect the instrument’s panel settings or the notes you play on the
keyboard.
NOTE
No MIDI reception occurs when Demo mode is engaged or during
file operations.
NOTE
For information on program change numbers for each of the Instru-
ment’s voices, Refer to MIDI Data Format on the web site.
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
NOTE
For information on control changes that can be used with the CLP-
370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306, refer to the MIDI Data Format in our
manual library at the following website.
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
69
F7.6:
(CLP-370/340)/
F7.6:
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Panel/Status Transmit
This function causes all the current instrument panel set-
tings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI
OUT terminal.
Procedure
1. Set up the panel controls as desired.
2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and
set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data.
3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-
370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330).
4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status
data.
will appear on the LED display when the data has
been successfully transmitted.
F7.7:
(CLP-370/340)/
F7.7:
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Initial Setup Send
This function lets you send the data of the panel settings
to a computer. By transmitting the panel settings and
recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to
the actual performance data, the instrument will be
automatically restored to the same settings when the per-
formance is played back. You can also use this function to
change the settings of a connected tone generator to the
same settings as the instrument.
Procedure
1. Set up the panel controls as desired.
2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and
set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data.
3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-
370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330).
4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status
data.
will appear on the LED display when the data has
been successfully transmitted.
The following data can be sent.
•Voice selection
[REVERB] type
[REVERB] depth
[EFFECT] type
[EFFECT] depth
Split point
•Tuning (F1)
•Dual detune (F3.2)
TERMINOLOGY
Setup Data:
Data that contains a set of panel settings for the Clavinova.
NOTE
For a list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmitted by this function,
refer to our manual library at the following website.
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
NOTE
Receiving the transmitted data:
1. Connect the Clavinova via MIDI to the device to which the setup
data was transmitted previously.
2. Start sending the setup data from the device.
The Clavinova automatically receives the setup data, which will be
reflected in the panel settings.
(For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the setup
data should be the same model as the one that transmitted the
setup data to the sequencer.)
NOTE
For more information on transmitting and receiving setup data via
MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI device.
Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION]
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
70
However, the backup settings themselves, the contents of
the user song recorder memory, character code settings
and internet settings are always backed up.
You can turn the backup function on or off for
each function group (each of the following
sub-mode functions).
1. Engage the Function mode and select
(CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-
330).
2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the
backup function’s sub-mode, then use the
[TEMPO/FUNCTION , ] buttons to select
the desired sub-mode.
Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to turn the
backup function on or off.
Sub-mode
F9.1:
(CLP-370/340)/F8.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Voice
F9.2:
(CLP-370/340)/F8.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
MIDI
F9.3:
(CLP-370/340)/F8.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Tuning
F9.4:
(CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Others
Setting range: ON/OFF
Normal setting: Vo i ce: OFF
MIDI – Others: ON
Description of sub-modes
F9.1:
(CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Voice
•Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split <CLP-370/340>)
•Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each
voice combination)
Split (CLP-370/340) (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Func-
tions for each voice combination)
•Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)
Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice)
•Variation (CLP-370/340) (for each voice)
•Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume)
•Metronome (Beat, Volume < (CLP-370/340)/
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) settings>)
F9.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
MIDI
The MIDI functions ( <CLP-370/340>/
<CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings)
(expect for the F7.6 and F7.7 <CLP-370/340>/
and <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330>)
F9.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Tuning
•Transpose
•Tuning ( settings)
Scale (including base note) ( settings)
F9.4: (CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Others
•Other functions ( <CLP-370/340>/
<CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings)
BRILLIANCE setting
•DAMPER RES. ON/OFF and Depth
If the song cannot be loaded, you may need to change the
character code setting.
Setting range: Int (English)/JA (Japanese)
Normal setting: Int
For details on how to set the LAN, see on pages 46 – 53, 58.
F8.
(CLP-370/340)
/ F7.
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Backup Functions
TERMINOLOGY
Backup:
You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and reverb
type, so that they will not be lost when you turn off the power to the
Clavinova.
If the backup function is turned on, the settings at power off are
effective. If the backup function is turned off, the settings in memory
are erased when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn
on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial settings) will
be used. (The factory setting default list is found on page 98.)
F8.5
(CLP-370/340)
/ F7.5
(CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330)
Character Code
F9
.
(CLP-370/340)/ F8
.
(CLP-S308/S306)
LAN Settings
Connections
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
71
Connections
Connectors
CAUTION
Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turn-
ing the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to
the components may result.
1 AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks
You can connect these jacks to a Keyboard amplifier system to monitor your play-
ing. Refer to the diagram below and use cables to make the connections. The Mas-
ter volume affects the AUX OUT signal. If you want to turn off the sound of the
internal speakers, use the speaker switch (page 15).
CAUTION
When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the
power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the
power off.
The sound via the internal speakers and headphones is set to the proper condition automatically (see below).
USB TO DEVICE
SELECT
USB
TO DEVICE
TO HOST
MIDI
IN
OUT
THRU
AUX IN
L/L+R
R
L/L+R
R
AUX OUT
5
4
3
CLP-370/340/330
3
1
6
2
CLP-370/340 only
Show the jacks as seen when
viewed from below the instrument.
CLP-370/340 only
CLP-370/340 only
On the left of the panel
CLP-S308/S306
4
5
21 6
RightLeft
NOTE
Use cables and plugs with no
resistance.
NOTE
Do not input the sound from the
AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN
jacks. This may cause a feedback
loop, and the output sound may
be excessively loud.
NOTE
If you want to take a mono signal
via the AUX OUT jack, connect a
cable to the [L/L+R] jack.
L/L+R
R
AUX OUT
AUX OUT
Clavinova Keyboard amplifier
AUX IN
Phone plug Phone plug
Cable
Speakers sound
Speakers do not sound
No plugs to connected to AUX OUT jacks Plugs connected to AUX OUT jacks
Speakers On Speakers Normal
(Headphones Switch)
Speakers Off Speakers On Speakers Normal
(Headphones Switch)
Speakers Off
Headphones
connected
Optimum equalization for
speakers applied
Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat
Headphones
not connected
Optimum equalization for
speakers applied
Optimum equalization for
speakers applied
Flat Flat Flat Flat
Connections
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
72
2 AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks
The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,
allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinovas
speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connec-
tions.
CAUTION
When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to
the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off.
3 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal
This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices.
Refer to “Connection to a USB storage device” on page 73.
4 USB [TO HOST] terminal
This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connect-
ing a Personal Computer” on page 75 for more information.
5 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals
Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.
MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.
MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.
MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is.
6 [LAN] terminal (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306)
Connect to the internet (see page 46).
NOTE
The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOL-
UME] slider setting affect the
input signal from the AUX IN
jacks, but the [BRILLIANCE],
[REVERB], and [EFFECT] set-
tings do not.
NOTE
If you connect the Clavinova to a
monaural device, use only the
AUX IN [L/L+R] jack.
AUX IN
L/L+R
R
Clavinova
OUTPUT
Tone Generator
Plug shape depends on
the device.
LINE OUT
Tone Generator
AUX IN
Phone plug
(standard)
Audio cable
AUX IN
Phone plug
(standard)
Audio cable
Phone plug
(standard)
NOTE
There are two different types of
USB terminals on the instrument:
USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO
HOST]. Take care not to confuse
the two terminals and the corre-
sponding cable connectors. Be
careful to connect the proper plug
in the proper direction.
NOTE
MIDI performance data and com-
mands are transferred in the form
of numeric values.
NOTE
Since MIDI data that can be
transmitted or received varies
depending on the type of MIDI
device, check the “MIDI Imple-
mentation Chart” to find out what
MIDI data and commands your
devices can transmit or receive.
Refer to the MIDI Implementation
Chart in the Data Format on the
website.
For information on how to access
and obtain the Data Format list,
see page 3.
Direct URL:
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
About MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/
reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices
and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the
Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer.
Connections
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
73
Connection to a USB storage device
By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data
you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device.
Compatible USB storage devices
A USB storage device, such as a floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, flash
memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Other
USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.
CAUTION
Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnect-
ing the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or
hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format
operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the “LOAD
TO USER” LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the
device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either
or both devices.
Connection to a USB storage device
The CLP-370/340 has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and
one on the terminal at the bottom.
Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the
[SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to A selects the terminal on
the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the bottom.
When the device is mounting, the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator flashes. When the
mounting operation is completed, the indicator goes off.
CAUTION
While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Export, Load, Delete or Format opera-
tions) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the FILE LOAD
LED flash stops), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data.
CAUTION
Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] A terminal before
closing the key cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device.
Formatting USB storage media
When executing a file-related operation with a connected USB storage device, a “For”
message may appear, indicating that the device or media may be unformatted. If this
happens, format the media (page 40).
CAUTION
The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution.
NOTE
CD-ROM drive
Although CD-R/RW drives can be
used to read data to the instru-
ment, they cannot be used for
saving data.
NOTE
Do not use a non-ID SmartMedia
card.
NOTE
Number of USB storage devices
Only one USB storage device can
be connected to the USB [TO
DEVICE] terminal. This instru-
ment can recognize only a single
drive in a USB storage device. If
one storage device contains more
than one drive, only one drive will
be automatically selected and
recognized.
NOTE
(CLP-370/340) If you connect
USB storage devices to both USB
[TO DEVICE] terminals, the
devices may not operate properly.
NOTE
Do not connect a USB hub to the
instrument.
NOTE
Remove the USB storage device
from the instrument before you
switch the A/B terminals.
NOTE
Though the instrument supports
the USB 1.1 standard, you can
connect and use a USB 2.0 stor-
age device with the instrument.
However, note that the transfer
speed is that of USB 1.1.
The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha can-
not guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices,
please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Man-
ual) for advice, or visit the following web page:
http://music.yamaha.com/download/
USB TO DEVICE
SELECT
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B
Select the desired terminal
Connections
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
74
To display the data in the USB storage device
To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG
SELECT] button a few times until the “USB” indicator lights (page 45).
To protect your data (write-protect):
To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each
storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect.
Backing up your data to a computer
Backing up the instrument data to a computer
Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your
computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as
shown below.
Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device
Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first
copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument.
Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files created on other
devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer.
Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the
instrument, and play back the data on the instrument.
Instrument
USB storage
device
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal
Saves internal data to a USB storage device.
Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it
to the computer.
Computer
USB storage device
Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders.
Instrument
USB storage
device
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal
Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument.
Computer
USB storage device
Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the
USB storage device.
Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it
to the instrument.
Connections
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
75
Connecting a Personal Computer
By connecting a computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data
between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. To do this, install the USB-MIDI driver and
Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”).
CAUTION
When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavi-
nova and the computer before connecting any cables. After making connections, turn on the
power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova.
CAUTION
If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must discon-
nect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a
cable is left connected.
Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST]
terminal on the Clavinova.
TERMINOLOGY
Driver:
A driver is software that provides
a data-transfer interface between
the computer’s operating system
and a connected hardware
device. You need to install a USB
MIDI driver to connect the com-
puter and the instrument.
NOTE
The instrument will begin trans-
mission a short time after the
USB connection is made.
When using a USB cable to
connect the instrument to your
computer, make the connec-
tion directly without passing
through a USB hub.
For information on setting up
your sequence software, refer
to the owner’s manual of the
relevant software.
Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal
When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the
following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the
data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the com-
puter OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.
CAUTION
Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.
Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-sav-
ing mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby).
Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO
HOST] terminal.
Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/
unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal.
- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted
only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.)
While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or
more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on
again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.
USB
TO DEVICE
TO HOST
USB [TO HOST] terminal
USB cable
Computer
Instrument
Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
76
Transmitting Song Data between the
Computer and the Instrument
In addition to the demo songs and the 50 piano preset songs stored in this instrument,
you can play data for other song by loading it from a connected computer. To be able to
use this function, you must first download Musicsoft Downloader from Yamaha web-
site, and install it on your computer (refer to Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Instal-
lation Guide”).
System requirement for Musicsoft Downloader
Loading Song Data from a Computer
to the Instrument
You can load piano song data from a computer to this instrument. Also, after you
record your performance on this instrument and save the recording to a computer, you
can load the recording back to the instrument.
This instrument can read MIDI data in SMF Format 0. However, if such data includes
any information for functions that are not supported by this instrument, the instru-
ment will not play the data correctly.
For more information on loading song data from a computer to this instrument, please
refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected
data)” in the Help file that came with Musicsoft Downloader.
Requirements for song data that can be loaded from a computer to this instrument
You can play the loaded Songs (page 44).
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power to this instrument or unplug the instrument during data transmission.
Otherwise, the data being transmitted will not be saved. Furthermore, flash memory operation
may become unstable, causing the entire memory to be erased when you turn the power to the
instrument on or off.
NOTE
You can download free Musicsoft
Downloader from the Yamaha
website.
NOTE
Do not manually change the file
name by using a computer; doing
so will render the file unable for
loading on the instrument.
NOTE
SMF (Standard MIDI File)
This file features a popular
sequence format (for recording
performance data). This file is
sometimes called a “MIDI file.”
The file extension is MID.
You can play the SMF format
song using music software or a
sequencer that supports SMF.
This instrument also supports
SMF.
NOTE
Before you use this instrument,
close the Musicsoft Downloader
window and quit the application.
•OS:Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/Vista
*For XP and Vista, the 32-bit version is supported, but not the 64-bit version.
CPU : Intel
®
Pentium
®
or Celeron
®
chip of 233MHz or Higher (500 MHz or higher is recom-
mended) or higher
Memory : 64MB or more (256MB or more is recommended)
•Available hard : at least 128MB of free space (at least 512MB of free space is recommended)
disk capacity
Display : 800 x 600 High Color (16-bit)
Others : Microsoft
®
Internet Explorer
®
version 5.5 or higher
Songs : user songs (loaded from instrument), SMF Format 0 songs
Maximum data size : 748KB
Data format : SMF Format 0
: Backuped data (loaded from instrument)
File name
08CLP-M.BUP (CLP-370/340)
08CLP-ML.BUP (CLP-330)
08CLP-S.BUP (CLPS308/S306)
Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
77
Transmitting Song Data from the
Instrument to a Computer
Musicsoft Downloader enables you to transfer the user song in this instrument to a
computer. For more information on transferring song data from this instrument to a
computer, please refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument
(for unprotected data)” in the Help file that came with Musicsoft Downloader.
Data you can transfer from this instrument to a computer
User song : your recorded songs
Back up data : panel settings
Song data (once it has been loaded from the computer)
Data Backup
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
78
Data Backup
For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you save your important data to your com-
puter by using the application Musicsoft Downloader (MSD). This provides a convenient backup if
the internal memory is damaged (refer to the “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation
Guide”).
Data that can be saved
• Panel settings and recorded User songs
Panel settings are the same data that can be backed up using the Backup Functions
(page 70). You can save the panel settings and recorded User songs as one file.
• External songs received via computer.
This includes external songs saved from the computer by using Musicsoft Downloader.
1. Install the USB MIDI driver and the MSD to your
computer (Windows), then connect the computer
and the instrument.
For installation, see the separate Installation Guide.
For connection, see page 75.
2. Move the data to the computer.
By using the MSD, save the “CLP-xxx.BUP” file from “System Drive” under
“Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer.
The “CLP-xxx.BUP” file contains the panel settings and recorded User songs.
Also, if you store the external songs in the instrument from the computer, move
the songs from “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the
computer via the MSD.
For instruction on using the MSD, see the Help in the MSD.
To recall the settings and load the songs to the instrument, move the “CLP-
xxx.BUP” file and the External songs under the folders to which you saved the
files.
NOTE
The file described in #1 at left
cannot be saved to a USB stor-
age device (CLP-370/340).
Procedure
NOTE
When MSD is started on a com-
puter connected to the instru-
ment, “con (computer
connection)” appears in the dis-
play. When this indication
appears, you cannot operate the
instrument.
NOTE
The Musicsoft Downloader can-
not be used when the instrument
is in the following state:
During Demo mode.
During song playback.
During Record mode.
During file operation (one of the
[FILE] button indicators is lit).
NOTE
The panel settings and User
songs (CLP-xxx.BUP file) remain
in the instrument after being
saved to the computer.
Message List
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
79
Message List
* Regarding the messages (and their explanations) for Internet Direct Connection, refer to the Yamaha web site:
http://services.music.yamaha.com/
Message Comment
CLr Displayed after factory presets are recalled.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “CLr” appears in the display. Doing so may delete all song
data in the instrument, including external songs (page 44).
con Displayed when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to the instrument.
When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument.
E01 Indicates failure in accessing the USB storage device because the device or media is damaged.
E02 Displayed when the song data is damaged or not recognized.
E04 Indicates that the song data is too large to be loaded.
End Displayed when the current operation is completed.
Err Displayed when the MIDI/USB cable is disconnected while starting Musicsoft Downloader on a computer con-
nected to the instrument.
FCL Indicates that internal memory has been cleaned up. Recorded songs, panel settings and external songs
which have been loaded from a computer are cleared, because the power has been turned off before the song
save or load operations were completed.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “FCL” appears in the display.
For Indicates that the instrument has engaged format mode for the USB storage device.
FUL Displayed when internal memory becomes full during song recording.
Displayed when the USB storage device becomes full and the song cannot be saved.
Displayed when the total amount of files has become too large.
Lod Displayed when a protected song is loading.
n y Confirms whether each operation is executed or not.
n
y
Reconfirms whether the overwriting, delete or format operation is executed or not.
Pro Indicates that the USB storage device or media is protected.
Troubleshooting
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
80
Troubleshooting
Options
BC-100 Bench
A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova.
HPE-160 Stereo Headphones
High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads.
UD-FD01 USB-FDD Unit
Floppy disk drive for connecting to the instrument and saving/loading data.
Problem Possible Cause and Solution
The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into
the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 14).
A click or pop is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument.
Noise is heard from the speakers or head-
phones.
The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close
proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the
Clavinova.
The overall volume is low, or no sound is
heard.
The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level using the [MASTER
VOLUME] control.
Make sure a pair of headphones is not connected to the headphones jack (when the
SPEAKER switch is set to the “NORMAL” position). If the SPEAKER switch is set to
the “OFF” position, set it to “NORMAL” or “ON” (page 15).
Make sure that Local Control (page 68) is ON.
The speakers do not switch off when a pair of
headphones is connected.
The SPEAKER switch may be switched “ON.” Set the SPEAKER switch to the “NOR-
MAL” position (page 15).
The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound
continuously sustains even when the damper
pedal is not pressed.
The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the
pedal plug into the proper jack (pages 83, 86).
The speaker sound is changed.
The AUX OUT jack may be connected. Make sure to disconnect the plug (see page 71).
Even though a USB storage device is con-
nected, the SONG SELECT “USB” indicator
does not turn on when pressing the [SONG
SELECT] button.
The USB storage device may not be recognized by the instrument, depending on the
device itself or the timing of the recognition.
1. (CLP-370/340) cheek the [SELECT] switch.
Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B”
selects the terminal panel at the bottom.
2. Check that the device is not damaged.
Check that the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator flashes after connecting the USB
storage device. If the indicator does not flash, the device may be damaged.
3. Check that the compatibility of the device has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 73).
4. Select SONG SELECT “USB” again.
It may take a while for the instrument to recognize the USB storage device. Press
the [SONG SELECT] button again to turn the “USB” indicator on.
The USB storage device has hung up
(stopped).
The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. Only use the devices
whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 73).
•Turn the instrument off and disconnect the device, then turn it back on and recon-
nect the device.
The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,“LOAD
TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE]
button flash simultaneously when a storage
device is connected.
Disconnect the USB storage device and turn the power of the instrument off. The USB
storage device is not compatible with the instrument.
The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,“LOAD
TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE]
button flash simultaneously for five seconds
when the USB storage device is operated.
Tr y disconnect the USB storage device once, then reconnect it.
Nothing is indicated in the LED display. Press the [–/NO] or [+YES] button and try again the operation again.
CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
81
CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION
Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface.
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the
unit in accordance with the sequence given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect
screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.
Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit.
•To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.
Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.
A
B
C
DE
Foamed styrol pads
Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them
on the floor, then place A on top of them.
Position the pads so that they will not block the speaker box
on the bottom of A.
A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side.
6 x 25 mm long screws x 4
6 x 16 mm short screws x 6
4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2
4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2
4 x 20 mm tapping
screws x 4
Headphone hanger
Headphone hanger
Cord holders x 2
Power cord
Assembly Parts
CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
82
1. Attach C to D and E.
1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord.
Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later
in step 5.
1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long
screws (6 x 25 mm).
2. Attach B.
Depending on the model of Clavinova you pur-
chased, the surface color of one side of B may be
different from the other side. In this case, posi-
tion B so that the side of the surface color most
similar to D and E faces you (as you would play
the instrument)
2-1 Align the screw holes on the upper side of B with
the bracket holes on D and E, then attach the
upper corners of B to D and E by finger-tighten-
ing two thin screws (4 x 12 mm).
2-2 Secure the bottom end of B using four tapping
screws (4 x 20 mm).
2-3 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that
were attached in Step 2-1.
3. Mount A.
Make sure that you mount the main unit by
holding the front bottom in areas that are at least
15 cm towards the center from either end and by
the handles on the rear panel.
CAUTION
Be extra careful not to drop or let your fingers be pinched by the
main unit.
CAUTION
Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the posi-
tion specified above.
4. Secure A.
4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right
ends of A will project beyond D and E equally
(as seen from the front).
4-2 Secure A by tightening six short screws (6 x 16
mm) from the front.
D
E
C
1-2
1-1
B
2-1
2-3
2-2
D
E
A
15 cm or further in
Align the screw
holes.
A
A
4-1
4-2
Projection of A
CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
83
5. Connect the pedal cord.
5-1 Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the
plug into the pedal connector.
5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as
shown, then clip the cord into the holders.
5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal
cord.
6. Connect the power cord.
6-1 Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a
voltage selector).
6-2 Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the
plug into the power connector.
7. Set the adjuster.
Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in
firm contact with the floor surface.
8. Attach the headphone hanger.
Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to
attach the hanger as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold
instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit
and by the handles in the rear of the main unit.
CAUTION
Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling
can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting
of the voltage selector which is provided in some
areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V
main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the
selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region
appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected,
connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC
wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in
some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC
wall outlets in your area.
PED
AL
240
127
110
220
6-1
5-2
5-3
6-2
5-1
After completing the assembly, please check the fol-
lowing.
Are there any parts left over?
Review the assembly procedure and correct any
errors.
Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
Move the instrument to an appropriate location.
Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you
shake it?
Tighten all screws.
Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step
on the pedals?
Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor.
Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into
the sockets?
Check the connection.
If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you
play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly
diagrams
and retighten all screws.
Key cover
Hold here.
Do not hold
here.
Top portion
CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
84
CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION
Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface.
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please
assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of
incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.
Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit.
•To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.
Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.
A
B
C
ED
Foamed styrol pads
Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position
them on the floor, then place A on top of them.
Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors
on the bottom of A.
A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side.
6 x 25 mm long screws x 4
6 x 16 mm short screws x 4
4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2
4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2
4 x 20 mm tapping
screws x 4
Headphone hanger
Headphone hanger
Cord holders x 2
Power cord
Assembly Parts
CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
85
1. Attach C to D and E.
1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord.
Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later
in step 5.
1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long
screws (6 x 25 mm).
2. Attach B.
Depending on the model of Clavinova you pur-
chased, the surface color of one side of B may be
different from the other side. In this case, posi-
tion B so that the side of the surface color most
similar to D and E faces you (as you would play
the instrument).
2-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E,
then align the screw holes on the upper side of B
with the bracket holes on D and E.
2-2 Attach the top corners of B to D and E by finger-
tightening two thin screws (4 x 12 mm).
2-3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from
outside, secure the bottom end of B using four
tapping screws (4 x 20 mm).
2-4 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that
were attached in Step 2-2.
3. Mount A.
Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm from
either end of the main unit when positioning it.
CAUTION
Be extra careful not to drop or let your fingers be pinched by the
main unit.
CAUTION
Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the posi-
tion specified above.
4. Secure A.
4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right
ends of A will project beyond D and E equally (as
seen from the front).
4-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x 16
mm) from the front.
D
C
E
1-1
1-2
2-1
B
D
E
2-2
2-4
2-3
Place the bot-
tom end of the
rear panel on
each foot.
A
15 cm or
further in
15 cm or
further in
4-1
4-2
A
Projection
of A
Insert the screw in the front of
these two holes.
CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
86
5. Connect the pedal cord and power cord.
5-1 Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the
plug into the pedal connector.
5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as
shown, then clip the cord into the holders.
5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal
cord.
6. Connect the power cord.
6-1 Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a
voltage selector).
6-2 Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the
plug into the power connector.
7. Set the adjuster.
Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in
firm contact with the floor surface.
8. Attach the headphone hanger.
Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to
attach the hanger as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the
bottom of the main unit.
CAUTION
Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling
can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting
of the voltage selector which is provided in some
areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V
main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the
selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region
appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected,
connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC
wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in
some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC
wall outlets in your area.
PEDAL
5-3
6-16-2
5-2
5-1
After completing the assembly, please check the fol-
lowing.
Are there any parts left over?
Review the assembly procedure and correct any
errors.
Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
Move the instrument to an appropriate location.
Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you
shake it?
Tighten all screws.
Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step
on the pedals?
Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor.
Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into
the sockets?
Check the connection.
If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you
play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly
diagrams
and retighten all screws.
PH
O
NE
S
Key cover
Hold here.
Top portion
Do not hold
here.
Do not hold
here.
CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
87
CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CAUTION
Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface.
Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please
assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below.
Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.
Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of
incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.
Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit.
•To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below.
Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.
Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.
B
C
D
EF
AA
Foamed styrol pads
Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position
them on the floor, then place A on top of them.
Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors
on the bottom of A.
Pedal cord
6 x 20 mm long screws x 10
6 x 16 mm short screws x 6
4 x 14 mm thin screws x 5
4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2
4 x 20 mm tapping
screws x 5
Headphone hanger
Headphone hanger
Cord holders x 2
Power cord
Assembly Parts
Connector panel
Protective
sheet
CAUTION
Please keep the protective sheet for later use. It will be used to
protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument
is transported. The protective sheet should be spread over the
entire keyboard before closing the key cover.
CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
88
1. Attach D to E and F.
1-1 Attach D to E and F by using four long screws
(6 x 20 mm).
1-2 Secure D from the rear using two long screws
(6 x 20 mm).
1-3 Remove the twist tie from the folded pedal cord.
Do not remove the twist tie that is located next to
the hole.
2. Temporarily mount B.
2-1
Insert B between E and F as shown in the illustration.
2-2 Align and attach B to the front side of D, E and F.
2-3 Temporarily secure B by finger-tightening four
long screws (6 x 20mm).
* Insert four screws into the larger holes (all four
holes) on the brackets.
2-4 Secure B using a thin screw (4 x 14 mm).
* Insert the screw into the smaller hole on the
bracket.
3. Mount A.
3-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end
of A to mount it.
3-2 Position A so that the stopper-wood on the rear
side of the bottom of A will be located behind the
front panel, then slide A slowly toward the rear
while lightly pushing E and F toward the center.
* Be sure to slide the guide pins 1 on each side of
A into the guide slots 2 on E and F respectively.
CAUTION
Be extra careful to avoid pinching your fingers or dropping A.
CAUTION
Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the posi-
tion shown in the illustration.
4. Secure A.
4-1 Secure A from the rear using two short screws
(6 x 16 mm).
4-2 Secure A from the rear using two thin screws
(4 x 14 mm).
4-3 Secure A from the front using four short screws
(6 x 16mm).
4-4 Firmly tighten the screws you temporarily
fastened on B in steps 2-3 above.
1-1
1-2
1-3
E
D
F
2-2
2-1
F
E
B
D
2-3
2-4
15cm
15cm
A
2
1
1
2
F
E
3-1
3-2
or
further in
or
further in
4-1
4-2
4-3
A
4-4
CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
89
5. Connect the speaker cord.
5-1 Remove the twist tie attaching the speaker cord.
5-2 Insert the speaker cord plug into the connector
so that the protruding tab on the plug faces
toward right when viewed from the rear.
6. Connect the pedal cord.
6-1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the [PEDAL] con-
nector.
6-2 Attach the cord holders to the instrument as
shown, then clip the cord into the holders. At this
time, be careful not to allow too much slack in
the pedal cord between the plug and cord holder.
7. Attach C.
7-1 Place on D, the stopper-wood in the bottom
corners of C, then attach the top of C.
7-2 Secure upper right and left of C using two thin
screws (4 x 14 mm).
7-3 Secure upper center and bottom of C using five
tapping screws (4 x 20 mm).
8. Connect the power cord.
8-1 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the
voltage selector to an appropriate voltage.
WARNING
An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the
Clavinova or result in improper operation.
8-2 Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC IN]
connector.
9. Set the adjuster to secure the pedals.
Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in
firm contact with the floor surface.
10.Attach the headphone hanger.
Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to
attach the hanger as shown in the illustration.
5-2
6-1
6-2
E
7-2
7-3
C
7-1
D
C
Voltage Selector
Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting
of the voltage selector which is provided in some
areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V
main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the
selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region
appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage
selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially
shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected,
connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC
wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in
some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC
wall outlets in your area.
CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
90
CAUTION
When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the
bottom of the main unit.
CAUTION
Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling
can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.
CAUTION
When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard
with the protective sheet (page 87) before closing the key cover.
The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched.
After completing the assembly, please check the fol-
lowing.
Are there any parts left over?
Review the assembly procedure and correct any
errors.
Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable
fixtures?
Move the instrument to an appropriate location.
Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you
shake it?
Tighten all screws.
Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step
on the pedals?
Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor.
Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into
the sockets?
Check the connection.
If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you
play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly
diagrams
and retighten all screws.
Key cover
Top portion
Hold here.
Do not hold
here.
Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340)
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
91
Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive
(CLP-370/340)
The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using
the included floppy disk drive case and screws.
For the CLP-330 and CLP-S308/S306: The disk drive can be used with the instrument but cannot be
attached as described here. When using the floppy disk drive with these models, simply put the
drive on the top panel. Make sure to remove the connected disk cable before you close the key
cover.
1. Remove the three backing papers from
the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the
floppy disk drive into the case.
2. Fold the USB cable inside the case as
shown.
3. Attach the drive and case assembly to the
left underside of the instrument, using the
included four screws (4mm x 10mm).
4. Connect the USB cable to the USB [TO
DEVICE] terminal.
Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.
Insert the drive to the case, with the side having
the rubber stoppers facing the case.
Dual-sided adhesive tape
Preset Voice List
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
92
Preset Voice List
CLP-370/340
Voice Name
Stereo
Sampling
Touch
Response
Dynamic
Sampling
*1
Key-Off
Sampling
*2
Voice Descriptions
GRANDPIANO 1
Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also
includes four levels of dynamic sampling, sustain samples,
and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic
grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as
well as any other style that requires acoustic piano.
VARIATION
Warm and mellow piano. Good for classical compositions.
GRANDPIANO 2
Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popu-
lar music.
VARIATION
Bright, spacious piano. Good for popular or rock music.
E.PIANO 1
An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis.
Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according
to keyboard dynamics. Good for standard popular music.
VARIATION
A synth-generated type electronic piano sound often heard
in popular music. Used in the DUAL mode it blends well with
an acoustic piano voice.
E.PIANO 2
The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic
“tines. Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone
when played hard.
VARIATION
A slightly different electric piano sound often heard in rock
and popular music.
HARPSICHORD
The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsi-
chord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response.
There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when
the keys are released.
VARIATION
Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant
tone.
E. CLAVICHORD
A hammer-struck keyboard instrument that utilizes an elec-
tric pickup that is often heard in funk and soul music. Its tone
is noted for the unique sound produced when the keys are
released.
VARIATION
Includes a unique preset effect.
VIBRAPHONE
Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone
becomes more metallic the harder you play.
VARIATION
Stereo-sampled, spacious, and realistic marimba.
CHURCH ORGAN
This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet).
Good for sacred music from the Baroque period.
VARIATION
This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with
Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.
JAZZ ORGAN
The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard
in jazz and rock idioms.
VARIATION
Uses a rotary speaker effect with a different speed. The vari-
ations speed is faster. If the variation is selected while hold-
ing a chord, the speed of the effect will gradually change.
STRINGS
Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic
reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL
mode.
VARIATION
Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining
this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.
CHOIR
A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmo-
nies in slow pieces.
VARIATION
A choir voice with a slow attack. Try combining this voice
with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.
: Yes
: No
Preset Voice List
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
93
GUITAR
Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet
ambience of nylon strings.
VARIATION
Bright, brilliant steel guitar. Suitable for popular music.
WOOD BASS
An upright bass played fingerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin
music.
VARIATION
Adds a cymbal voice to the bass sound. Ideal for walking
bass lines in jazz tunes.
E.BASS
Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock,
popular, and more.
VARIATION
A fretless bass good for styles such as jazz, fusion, etc.
*1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of
an acoustic instrument.
*2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released.
Voice Name
Stereo
Sampling
Touch
Response
Dynamic
Sampling
*1
Key-Off
Sampling
*2
Voice Descriptions
Preset Voice List
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
94
CLP-330, CLP-S308/S306
Voice Name
Stereo
Sampling
Touch
Response
Dynamic
Sampling
*1
*1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of
an acoustic instrument.
Key-Off
Sampling
*2
*2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released.
Voice Descriptions
GRANDPIANO 1
Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect
for classical compositions as well as any other style that
requires acoustic piano.
GRANDPIANO 2
Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popu-
lar music.
E.PIANO 1
An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Good
for standard popular music.
E.PIANO 2
The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic
“tines. Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone
when played hard.
HARPSICHORD 1
The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsi-
chord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response.
There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when
the keys are released.
HARPSICHORD 2
Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant
tone.
VIBRAPHONE
Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone
becomes more metallic the harder you play.
CHURCH ORGAN 1
This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet).
Good for sacred music from the Baroque period.
CHURCH ORGAN 2
This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with
Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.
JAZZ ORGAN
The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard
in jazz and rock idioms.
STRINGS 1
Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic
reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL
mode.
STRINGS 2
Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining
this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode.
CHOIR
A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmo-
nies in slow pieces.
GUITAR
Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet
ambience of nylon strings.
: Yes
: No
Demo Song List
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
95
Demo Song List
The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts of the original compositions.
All other songs are original (©2008 Yamaha Corporation).
Piano Voice Demo Description (CLP-370/340)
Voice Name CLP-370/340 CLP-330,
CLP-S308/
S306
Title Composer
GRAND PIANO1 Albumbard, Lyriske stykker
IV, op.47-2
E. H. Grieg
HARPSICHORD
Concerto a cembalo obbligato,
2 violini, viola e continuo
No.7, BWV.1058
J. S. Bach
HARPSICHORD1
HARPSICHORD2 Gigue, Französische Suiten
Nr.5, BWV.816
CHURCH ORGAN
Herr Christ, der ein’ge Gottes-
Sohn, BWV.601
CHURCH ORGAN1
CHURCH ORGAN2
Tr iosonate Nr.6, BWV.530
Voice Name Piano Voice Demo
GRAND PIANO1 Stereo sampling
GRAND PIANO2 Monaural sampling
E.PIANO1 With sustain sampling
E.PIANO2 Without sustain sampling
HARPSICHORD With key-off sampling
E.CLAVICHORD Without key-off sampling
: Included
: Not included
Index
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
96
Index
Numerics
50 greats for the Piano.....................................................17
50 Piano Preset Songs......................................................17
A
A-B Repeat .......................................................................19
Adjust
Tempo (50 Piano Preset Songs) ...............................17
Tempo (Recorded Songs) .........................................44
Volume (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................17
Volume (Metronome) ..............................................67
ALL (LED display).....................................................17, 45
Assembly ..........................................................................81
AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks...............................................72
AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks...........................................71
B
Backup (Data)..................................................................78
Backup Functions ............................................................70
[BRILLIANCE] button....................................................22
C
Character Code................................................................70
Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ............................26
Connecting a Personal Computer.......................75, 76, 77
Connection to a USB storage device...............................73
Connections.....................................................................71
Computer.......................................................75, 76, 77
USB storage device ....................................................73
Connectors.......................................................................71
D
Damper Pedal ..................................................................21
Damper Pedal Range .......................................................65
[DAMPER RES.] button .................................................23
Damper Resonance..........................................................23
Delete ...............................................................................39
[DEMO] button...............................................................16
Demo Song List................................................................95
Demonstration Tunes .....................................................16
Display .............................................................................14
Dual mode .................................................................26, 64
E
[EFFECT] button.......................................................22, 23
Equal Temperament........................................................63
Export ..............................................................................36
F
Factory Setting List..........................................................98
[FILE] button .................................................................. 37
Fine Tuning of the Pitch .................................................62
Floppy Disk Drive ...........................................................42
Installation.................................................................91
Format ................................................................. 40, 41, 42
Function...........................................................................62
Basic Procedure.........................................................60
Parameter List ...........................................................59
H
Half-pedal........................................................................21
Hz (Hertz) .......................................................................62
I
Internet Direct Connection ............................................46
Internet Settings ..............................................................49
Internet song....................................................................56
K
Key Cover ........................................................................12
Keyboard Stand ...............................................................81
Keyoff Sample Volume ...................................................66
Kirnberger........................................................................63
L
LAN Port driver...............................................................53
LAN Settings..............................................................49, 70
[LAN] terminal................................................................72
[LEFT] button ........................................................... 18, 33
Left Pedal .........................................................................21
Left Pedal Mode...............................................................66
List
Factory Setting........................................................... 98
Functions...................................................................59
Preset Voice ...............................................................94
Load ..................................................................... 36, 38, 45
M
[MASTER VOLUME] slider...........................................15
Mean Tone.......................................................................63
Index
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
ENGLISH
97
Message List .....................................................................79
Metronome ......................................................................29
METRONOME [ON/OFF] button...........................67, 29
Metronome Volume........................................................67
MIDI ................................................................................72
MIDI Functions...............................................................67
MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals............................72
Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ..........................................14
Music Rest........................................................................13
Musicsoft Downloader ....................................................78
N
Normal setting .................................................................22
P
Part Cancel.......................................................................18
Part Playback On and Off................................................45
[PEDAL] jack...................................................................83
Pedal Play/Pause ..............................................................45
Pedals ...............................................................................21
[PHONES] jacks..............................................................15
Piano Voice Demo Description ......................................95
[PLAY/PAUSE] button..............................................16, 17
Play/Pause playback
Useful Playback Functions........................................45
Playing Back Songs ....................................................43, 44
[POWER] switch .............................................................14
Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs.18
Preset Song.......................................................................17
Preset Voice List.........................................................92, 94
Program version number ................................................53
Pure Major.......................................................................63
Pure Minor.......................................................................63
Pythagorean .....................................................................63
R
[REC] button ...................................................................31
Recording.........................................................................30
Initial Settings............................................................35
RIGHT/LEFT parts....................................................33
Re-recording ..............................................................32, 34
[REVERB] button............................................................22
[RIGHT] button ........................................................18, 33
Right Pedal.......................................................................21
rnd (LED display)......................................................17, 45
S
Save.............................................................................36, 37
Scale..................................................................................63
[SELECT] switch .............................................................73
SMF (Standard MIDI File)..............................................36
Soft Pedal................................................................... 21, 66
Soft Pedal Effect Depth ...................................................66
Song .................................................................................17
SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button ........................... 16, 17, 44
[SONG SELECT] button ..........................................17, 44
SONG [STOP] button...............................................17, 44
[SPEAKER] switch ..........................................................15
Specifications.................................................................100
SPLIT (CLP-370/340) (Function) ..................................65
[SPLIT] button................................................................27
Split mode..................................................................27, 65
Split Point .................................................................. 27, 65
Sustain Sample Depth .....................................................66
Sync (Synchronized) .......................................................45
Sync Start ......................................................................... 18
T
[TEMPO/FUNCTION] button ................................ 29, 60
[TOUCH] button............................................................24
Touch Sensitivity............................................................. 24
Transporting...................................................................... 6
[TRANSPOSE] button....................................................25
Transposition ..................................................................25
Troubleshooting.............................................................. 80
U
USB Storage Device................................................... 40, 73
USB [TO DEVICE] terminal .................................... 72, 73
USB [TO HOST] terminal........................................72, 75
USB-LAN Adapter...........................................................54
V
[VARIATION] button ....................................................22
Voice ................................................................................20
Voice group buttons........................................................20
W
Werckmeister...................................................................63
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
98
Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen /
Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica
Function
Default
Backup Group
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330,
CLP-S308/
S306
Voice GRAND PIANO 1
F8.1
F7.1
Variation (CLP-370/340) OFF
Dual Mode OFF F7.1
Split Mode (CLP-370/340) OFF
Split Mode Left Voice (CLP-370/340) WOOD BASS
Brilliance NORMAL F8.4 F7.4
Reverb Type Preset for each voice
F8.1 F7.1
Reverb Depth Preset for each voice
Effect Type Preset for each voice
Effect Depth Preset for each voice
Touch Sensitivity MEDIUM
Volume in the FIXED Mode 64
DAMPER RES. ON F8.4
DAMPER RES. Depth 6 F8.4
Metronome OFF
Metronome Time Signature 0 (no accent)
Tempo 120
Transpose 0 F8.3 F7.3
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330,
CLP-S308/
S306
Function Default
Backup Group
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330,
CLP-S308/
S306
F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz
F8.3 F7.3F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament)
F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C
F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination
F8.1 F7.1
F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination
F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination
F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination
F4.1 Split Point F
2
F4.2 Split Balance Preset for each voice combination
F4.3, F4.4 Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination
F4.5, F4.6 Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination
F4.7 Damper Pedal Range ALL
F5.1 F4.1 Left Pedal Mode 1 (Soft Pedal)
F8.4 F7.4
F5.2 F4.2 Soft Pedal Effect Depth 3
F5.3 Sustain Sample Depth 12
F5.4 Keyoff Sample Volume 10
F5.5 F4.3 Song Channel Selection ALL
F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10 F8.1 F7.1
Appendix
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
99
F7.1 F6.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1
F8.2 F7.2
F7.2 F6.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL
F7.3 F6.3 Local Control ON
F7.4 F6.4 Program Change Send &
Receive
ON
F7.5 F6.5 Control Change Send &
Receive
ON
F8 F7 Backup Voice: OFF
MIDI – Others: ON
Always backed up
F8.5 F7.5 Character Code Int
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330,
CLP-S308/
S306
Function Default
Backup Group
CLP-370/
340
CLP-330,
CLP-S308/
S306
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
100
Specifications / Technische Daten /
Caractéristiques techniques / Especificaciones
CLP-370 CLP-340 CLP-330 CLP-S308 CLP-S306
Size /
Weight
Width 1408 mm (55-7/16") 1449 mm (57-1/16")
Height
[For models with
polished finish]
917 mm (36-1/8")
[920 mm (36-1/4")]
[977 mm (38-7/16")]
Height with music
rest
[For models with
polished finish]
1018 mm (40-1/16")
[1019 mm (40-1/8")]
1019 mm (40-1/8")
[1021 mm (40-3/16")]
Depth
511mm (20-1/8") 514mm (20-1/4") 430 mm (16-15/16")
Weight
[For models with
polished finish]
78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.)
[81 kg (178lbs., 9 oz.)]
69 kg (152lbs., 2 oz.)
[71 kg (156lbs., 8 oz.)]
65 kg (143lbs., 5 oz.)
[68 kg (149lbs., 15 oz.)]
[78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.)]
Control
Interface
Number of Keys 88
Keyboard Type
NW
(Natural Wood)
with
Synthetic ivory
keytops
(Wood is used for the
white keys)
GH3
(Graded Hammer 3)
with Synthetic ivory
keytops
GH3
(Graded Hammer 3)
NW
(Natural Wood)
with
Synthetic ivory
keytops
(Wood is used for
the white keys)
GH3
(Graded Hammer 3)
with Synthetic ivory
keytops
Touch Sensitivity Ye s
Number of Pedal 3
Half Pedal Ye s
Pedal Functions Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft
Display 7-Segment LED
Cabinet
Key Cover Style Sliding Folding
Music Rest Yes
Music Clips Yes
Voices
Tone Generation
Technology
AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling
Stereo Sustain
Samples
Ye s
Key-off Samples Ye s
Number of Polyphony
(Max.)
128
Number of Voices
14 x 2
variations
14
Effect
Reverb 4 types
Brilliance 5 types
Chorus Yes
Dual Yes
Split Yes
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
101
*Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify
products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please
check with your Yamaha dealer.
*Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor,
Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das
Gerät selbst bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.
*Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de
changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les
équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.
* Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el
derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especifica-
ciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha.
Songs
Number of Preset
Songs
50
Recording
Number
of Songs
3
Number
of Tracks
2
Data
Capacity
User songs (100KB X 3 (ca.11,000 notes X 3)),
External songs (447KB)
Compatible
Data
Format
Playback
SMF (Format 0 & 1)
Recording
SMF (Format 0)
Functions
Metronome Yes
Tempo Range 32-280
Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12
Tuning Yes
Scale Type 7 types
Storage
Floppy Disk Drive Optional
Internal Memory User songs 300KB, External songs 447KB
External Device Optional
Connectivity
Headphones x 2
MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU]
AUX IN [L/L+R][R]
AUX OUT [L/L+R][R]
USB [TO DEVICE]
x 2
(selectable)
x 1
USB [TO HOST] Yes
[LAN] Yes
Ye s
Amplifiers/
Speakers
Amplifiers 40W x 2 20W x 2 40W x 2
Speakers (16cm + 5cm) x 2 16cm x 2 (16cm + 5cm) x 2
Speaker Boxes Ye s
Ye s
Bundled
Software
CD-ROM Ye s
Accessories
Included Accessories
Owner’s Manual, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows,
Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide,
“50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection,
My Yamaha Product User Registration,
Bench (included or optional depending on locale)
CLP-370 CLP-340 CLP-330 CLP-S308 CLP-S306
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
102
MEMO
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
103
MEMO
CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual
104
MEMO
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-
tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and main-
tenance (servicing) instructions in the litera-
ture accompanying the product.
The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-
pod, bracket, or table specified by
the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/
apparatus combination to avoid
injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused
for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-
vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-
aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen
into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
(UL60065_03)
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved
by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the
FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high
quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this
product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc-
tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your
FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to
comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regula-
tions, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compli-
ance with these requirements provides a reasonable
level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful inter-
ference with other electronic devices. This equipment
generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed
and used according to the instructions found in the
users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of
other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-
tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur
in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by turn-
ing the unit “OFF” and “ON,” please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon
lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation
of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangeth-
orpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its sub-
sidiaries.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
BLUE : NEUTRAL
BROWN : LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings
identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America
Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,
Calif. 90620
Telephone : 714-522-9011
Type of Equipment
: Digital Piano
Model Name : CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308PE/
S306PE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2)
this device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception
is suspected.
This applies only to products distributed by
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
(2 wires) * This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Switzerland
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Austria, CEE Department
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
POLAND
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,
Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
GREECE
Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House
147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-228 2160
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
F-Musiikki Oy
Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 09 618511
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii
Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia
Tel: 495 626 0660
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),
Jingan, Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2737-7688
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 080-004-0022
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 3-78030900
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16
th
floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2626
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2317
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
NEW ZEALAND
Music Works LTD
P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,
New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
AFRICA
MIDDLE EAST
ASIA
OCEANIA
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-3273
EKB45
U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation
© 2008 Yamaha Corporation
WN75950 109MWAP*.*-**B1 Printed in China
Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page
http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
DIC 2164

Documenttranscriptie

OWNER’S MANUAL ENGLISH DEUTSCH CLP-370/340/330 CLP-S308/S306 BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES —Check your power supply— Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a "minus" screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. WICHTIG IMPORTANT IMPORTANTE Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen Stromnetz mit der Spannung übereinstimmt, die auf dem Typenschild auf der Unterseite des Instruments angegeben ist. In bestimmten Regionen ist auf der Unterseite des Keyboards in der Nähe des Netzkabels ein Spannungswähler angebracht. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Spannungswähler auf die Spannung Ihres lokalen Stromnetzes eingestellt ist. Dieser Spannungswähler ist bei Auslieferung auf 240 V eingestellt. Sie können die Einstellung mit einem Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern. Drehen Sie dazu den Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf dem Instrument auf die richtige Spannung zeigt. Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su área corresponde con la tensión especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tensión se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza "recta" para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. —Überprüfen Sie Ihren Netzanschluss— Weitere Informationen über die Montage des Keyboard-Ständers erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen am Ende dieses Handbuchs. —Contrôler la source d'alimentation— Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'assemblage du support du clavier, reportez-vous aux instructions à la fin de ce manuel. —Verifique la alimentación de corriente— ESPAÑOL IMPORTANT FRANÇAIS MODE D’EMPLOI Para información sobre el montaje del soporte del teclado, consulte las instrucciones al final de este manual. EN DE FR ES Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 (bottom) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Model Serial No. Purchase Date Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the Clavinova. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following: Owner’s Manual (this book) Reference (page 16): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Appendix (page 98): This section introduces reference material. ENGLISH Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. Data List You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library. Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as “CLP-370”) in the Model Name text box, then click the Search button. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ * The models CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will be referred to as the CLP/Clavinova in this owner’s manual. * The illustrations and LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. * The panel illustrations shown in this owner’s manual are taken from the CLP-370. * Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE-TCP™, a TCP/IP protocol stack by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) AVE™-SSL, an encryption module technology by ACCESS Co., Ltd., is installed in this product. Copyright © 1997-2008 ACCESS CO., LTD. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: ENGLISH Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. (1)B-12 4 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 1/2 • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Using the bench (If included) • (For polish-finished model) Gently remove dust and dirt with a soft cloth. Do not wipe too hard since small particles of dirt can scratch the instrument’s finish. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • Do not attempt to adjust the bench height while sitting on the bench, since this can cause excessive force to be imposed on the adjustment mechanism, possibly resulting in damage to the mechanism or even injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • (For polish-finished model) Bumping the surface of the instrument with metal, porcelain, or other hard objects can cause the finish to crack or peel. Use caution. Saving data ENGLISH Maintenance Saving and backing up your data • Data in the instrument’s internal memory can be lost due to operational errors or malfunction. Be sure to save any important data to external media via a computer connected to the instrument. (page 78) Backing up the USB Storage device • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-12 2/2 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 5 Accessories • “50 greats for the Piano” (Music Book) • Owner’s Manual This manual contains complete instructions for operating your Clavinova. • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide • Bench A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale. • My Yamaha Product User Registration ENGLISH The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with your other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. CAUTION (CLP-S308/S306) Cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) packaged with the instrument before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument is transported. 6 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Features Highly evolved touch and expression: Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard (CLP-330) and Graded Hammer 3 (GH3) keyboard with artificial ivory top (CLP-340, CLP-S306) The Graded Hammer keyboard features natural grand-piano type key weights (heavier in the low range and lighter in the higher range) providing a pleasant playability that is unmatched by conventional electronic pianos. Ultimate natural playability: Natural Wood (NW) keyboard with artificial ivory top (CLP-370, CLP-S308) ENGLISH The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for legato (without pedal operation) and repetitivestriking techniques, as with a grand piano. The CLP-340 and CLP-S306 feature an “artificial ivory” keyboard top, which simulates the moderate hygroscopic characteristics of real ivory and offers a less slippery surface, smooth key movement, and a warm and inviting color. In addition to the features offered by the GH3 keyboard with artificial ivory top model, the NW keyboard uses natural wood for the inside of the white keys, as seen on an acoustic piano. This feature provides a heavier weighted touch that surpasses that of conventional electronic pianos and is closer in feel to a grand piano. Digital recording of a full-size concert grand piano sound (via AMW Dynamics Stereo Sampling) This digital piano offers a rich and versatile range of sounds, which are created using Yamaha's proprietary sampling tone-generation system, “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling.” AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) is a sampling system that creates sounds close to those of an acoustic instrument by digitally recording the sounds of an instrument and applying high-quality digital filtering technology to the recorded audio samples. The sound waveform created by an acoustic piano differs depending on the player's strength of touch, from pianissimo to fortissimo. AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling can create extremely dynamic nuances by recording samples at various playing strengths. The greater the number of samples used, the greater the resulting expressiveness of the instrument. The piano voice “Grand Piano 1” features a totally new sample recorded from a full-size concert grand piano. Each note in the sample has been adjusted meticulously so that the digital piano will play only the very best piano sounds. The piano voices are well-separated sounds featuring a fast attack and a satisfying response. The “Grand Piano 1” voice features multiple wave samples for different velocities (Dynamic Sampling). That is, different samples are used depending on how fast or strong the player strikes the keys. Therefore, this voice expresses detailed dynamics and sounds much closer to those of a true acoustic piano. The CLP-370/340 creates a rich, luxurious sound using “Sustain Sampling,” which is a sample of the soundboard and the resonance of the strings when the damper pedal is pressed. The instrument also features “Key-off Sampling,” which is a sample of the very delicate noises that are caused when keys are released. Internet Direct Connection function (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) You can connect these digital piano models to the Internet, enabling you to access and enjoy a broad range of song data files that are available on a dedicated website. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 7 Table of Contents ENGLISH Introduction About this Owner’s Manual and Data List.............................................................................. 3 Accessories............................................................................................................................... 6 Panel Controls and Terminals ............................................................................................... 10 Before Using the Clavinova................................................................................................... 12 Key Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Music Rest .................................................................................................................................................... 13 Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ...................................................................................................................... 14 Turning the Power On ................................................................................................................................ 14 Setting the Volume ...................................................................................................................................... 15 Using Headphones....................................................................................................................................... 15 Using the Speaker Switch ............................................................................................................................ 15 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes ................................................................................. 16 Reference Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ...................................................................................... 17 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) .................................... 18 A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs................................................................................................................... 19 Selecting & Playing Voices .................................................................................................... 20 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................ 20 Using the Pedals........................................................................................................................................... 21 Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/ [EFFECT]/[DAMPER RES.] ....................................................................................................................... 22 Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH].................................................................................................................. 24 Transposition — [TRANSPOSE] ............................................................................................................... 25 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ........................................................................................................ 26 Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340) ............ 27 Using the Metronome ................................................................................................................................. 29 Recording Your Performance................................................................................................ 30 Recording a performance quickly............................................................................................................... 30 Playing back a recorded song ...................................................................................................................... 32 Re-recording a previously recorded song................................................................................................... 32 Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts ............................................................................................................... 33 Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) ............................................... 35 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device......................................................................... 36 About Save and Load................................................................................................................................... 36 Saving a Song ............................................................................................................................................... 37 Loading a Song............................................................................................................................................. 38 Deleting Song Files ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Formatting the USB Storage Device ........................................................................................................... 40 Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/Floppy Disk, etc.) ............................................ 41 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks....................................................................... 42 Playing Back Songs................................................................................................................ 43 Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument............................................................................... 44 Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device ............................................................................... 45 Useful Playback Functions .......................................................................................................................... 45 8 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ............................................... 46 Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection .................................................................................. 46 Connecting the Instrument to the Internet................................................................................................ 48 About the Internet Settings ......................................................................................................................... 49 Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) .................................................. 51 Exporting the Connection Information ..................................................................................................... 52 Other Internet Operations .......................................................................................................................... 53 Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ................................... 56 Glossary of Internet Terms.......................................................................................................................... 57 Initializing the data...................................................................................................................................... 58 Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] ......................................................................................... 59 Basic Procedure in Function Mode ............................................................................................................ 60 About Each Function................................................................................................................................... 62 F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch.................................................................................................................. 62 F2. Selecting a Scale ............................................................................................................................... 63 F3. Dual Mode Functions...................................................................................................................... 64 F4. (CLP-370/340) Split Mode Functions ............................................................................................ 65 F5. (CLP-370/340) / F4. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Other Functions .............................................. 66 F6. (CLP-370/340) / F5. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Metronome Volume ....................................... 67 F7. (CLP-370/340) / F6. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Functions .............................................. 67 F8. (CLP-370/340) / F7. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Backup Functions............................................ 70 F8.5 (CLP-370/340)/ F7.5 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Character Code ............................................ 70 F9. (CLP-370/340)/ F8. (CLP-S308/S306) LAN Settings ..................................................................... 70 Connections........................................................................................................................... 71 Connectors ................................................................................................................................................... 71 Connection to a USB storage device........................................................................................................... 73 Connecting a Personal Computer .............................................................................................................. 75 Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument ................................ 76 Loading Song Data from a Computer to the Instrument.......................................................................... 76 Transmitting Song Data from the Instrument to a Computer ................................................................. 77 Data Backup........................................................................................................................... 78 Message List .......................................................................................................................... 79 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................... 80 Options .................................................................................................................................. 80 CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly ..................................................................................... 81 CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly ............................................................................. 84 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly.......................................................................... 87 Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340) .................................................... 91 Preset Voice List .................................................................................................................... 92 Demo Song List ..................................................................................................................... 95 Index...................................................................................................................................... 96 Appendix Factory Setting List................................................................................................................ 98 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 100 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Panel Controls and Terminals The panel illustrations shown are taken from the CLP-370. 2 3 4 5 6 ! 8 9 ) @ * ENGLISH 7 # $ % ^ ( & 1 SELECT USB TO DEVICE CLP-370/340 only This illustration shown is taken from the CLP-370. OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER ∞ ¢ PHONES Pedal jack for CLP-340/330 is next to the MIDI jacks. Pedal jack for CLP-S308/S306 is next to the LAN Jack. Front CLP-370/340/330 ¶ OUT MIDI L/L+R AUX IN º £ § CLP-370/ 340 only TO DEVICE USB TO HOST R IN L/L+R R ¡ AUX OUT THRU Shows the jacks as seen when viewed from below the instrument. ™ ( CLP-S308/S306 CLP-370/ 340 only Front Left Shows the jacks as seen when viewed from below the instrument. 10 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Right ™ £ ¡ º § Panel Controls and Terminals Adjust the volume level using this slider. 3 [DEMO] button ..............................page 16 Demonstration playback is available for each voice. 4 [TRANSPOSE] button.....................page 25 You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same, unshifted keys. 5 [REC] button .................................page 30 For recording your keyboard performance. 6 [RIGHT], [LEFT] buttons ............................................... pages 18, 33 For turning the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. ^ [BRILLIANCE], [REVERB], [EFFECT] buttons .......................................... page 22 For adjusting the brightness of the sound and adding reverb effects to the sound. & [TOUCH] button ............................ page 24 For adjusting the touch response. * [DAMPER RES.] button ................. page 23 For turning the Damper Resonance function on or off. When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. ( USB [TO DEVICE] terminals ........... page 72 For connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, allowing saving/loading of data to and from the connected device. On the CLP-370 and CLP-340, there are two TO DEVICE terminals, A and B, which can be specified using the [SELECT] switch. 7 [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons ............................................... pages 16, 44 º AUX OUT [L/ L+R][R] jacks ............ page 71 For playing back the preset songs or your recorded songs, etc. You can also play back songs from the Internet over a special website. ¡ AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks ............... page 72 8 [SONG SELECT] button ......... pages 17, 56 For selecting a song to play back or edit. 9 [FILE] button ......................... pages 36, 40 For saving songs to and loading songs from a USB storage device, as well as managing song files. Also, lets you format a USB storage device. ) [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button ............................................... pages 29, 60 For changing the song tempo (speed) and selecting other useful functions (pages 59 – 70). ! [METRONOME] button ............................................... pages 29, 67 For using the metronome. @ Display............................................page 14 CAUTION Do not turn off the power to the instrument while flashing dashes appear in the display (indicating the operation is in process). Doing so may damage the data. # [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons For setting values or performing file operations. Pressing both buttons simultaneously for certain value settings (Transpose, Tempo, etc.) restores the default value. $ Voice group buttons ......................page 20 For selecting voices from 14 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1 and 2. You can also combine two voices and use them together. (Only the CLP-370 and CLP-340 has the [VARIATION] button.) ENGLISH 1 [POWER] switch .............................page 14 2 [MASTER VOLUME] slider..............page 15 For outputting the sound of the Clavinova to an external audio system. For connecting an external tone generator, allowing you to play the sound of that device via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. ™ USB [TO HOST] terminal .............. page 72 For connecting the instrument to your computer, allowing you to transfer MIDI data between the Clavinova and the computer. £ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals ....................................................... page 72 For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of various MIDI functions. ¢ [PHONES] jacks, [SPEAKER] switch ....................................................... page 15 For connecting a set of standard stereo headphones, allowing private practice. The [SPEAKER] switch turns the internal speakers on or off. ∞ PEDALS........................................... page 21 For producing a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. The left pedal can also be assigned to a variety of functions. § [LAN] jack (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ....................................................... page 72 For connecting a LAN cable to access special Internet websites for this instrument, and playing songs from the Internet. ¶ [PEDAL] jack .................................. page 83 For connecting a pedal cable. % [SPLIT] button (CLP-370/340) .......page 27 For playing different voices on the left- and righthand sections of the keyboard. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 11 Before Using the Clavinova Before Using the Clavinova Key Cover CLP-370/340/330 To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: ENGLISH Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CLP-S308/S306 To open the key cover: To close the key cover: 1. Hold the front edge of the key cover top with both hands, then open the key cover slowly. 1. If the music rest is unfolded, fold it back. CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers (or those of children) when opening or closing it. 2. Close the edge of the key cover. (Fold it down so that it is flat with the cover.) 2. Unfold the edge of the key cover. 3. Hold the key cover with both hands and close it slowly. CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers (or those of children) when opening or closing it. 12 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Before Using the Clavinova CAUTION Be careful not to pinch your fingers or the fingers of child when opening or closing it. CAUTION Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. CAUTION Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] A terminal before closing the key cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device. ENGLISH CAUTION (CLP-S308/S306) When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched. Music Rest CLP-370/340/330 To raise the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. 3. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. To lower the music rest: 1. Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. 2. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). 3. Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. CLP-S308/S306 Unfold the music rest When opening the key cover, unfold the music rest. Fold the music rest When closing the key cover, fold the music rest. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 13 Before Using the Clavinova Music Braces (CLP-370/340) These braces are for holding the pages of music books in place. To open To close ENGLISH Turning the Power On 1.Connect the power cord. Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC IN on the Clavinova, and the other into a standard AC outlet. In some areas, a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1-1 CLP-370/340/330 Shows the AC IN as seen when viewed from below the instrument. (bottom surface) 1-2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) CLP-S308/S306 AC IN is located on the rear of the instrument. WARNING Make sure your instrument is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the AC IN. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the Clavinova. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the Clavinova may be different depending on the countr y in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the Clavinova. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2.Turn the power on. Press the [POWER] switch. • The display located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. [POWER] switch Power indicator Display Normally indicates tempo. When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [POWER] switch again. • The display and the power indicator turn off. NOTE Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. 14 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Before Using the Clavinova Setting the Volume Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about halfway between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level. The level decreases. The level increases. CAUTION Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time; doing so may damage your hearing. TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: NOTE You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX OUT level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. You can connect two sets of standard stereo headphones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either jack.) ENGLISH The volume level of the entire keyboard sound. bottom surface OFF ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER standard stereo phone plug PHONES Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the Clavinova package so that you can conveniently hang the headphones on the Clavinova. Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Doing so may damage the Clavinova or the hanger. Using the Speaker Switch OFF This switch turns the internal speakers on or off. NORMAL (HP. SW) ......... The speakers produce sound as long as a pair of headphones is not connected. ON ....................................... The speakers always produce sound. OFF ...................................... The speakers produce no sound. ON NORMAL HP. SW SPEAKER PHONES CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 15 Reference Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Listening to the Demonstration Tunes Demonstration tunes are provided that effectively demonstrate each of the Clavinova’s voices. 1 2 4 4 3 3 CLP-370 ENGLISH Procedure 1. Turn the power on. (In case the power is not turned ON) Press the [POWER] switch. When the power is turned ON, one of the voice button LEDs will light. Initially set the [MASTER VOLUME] slider about half way between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to the most comfortable listening level. 2. Engage Demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage Demo mode. The voice button indicators will flash in sequence. 3. Play a Voice demo. Press one of the voice buttons to start playback of all songs starting from the corresponding voice demo tune — featuring the voice normally selected by that voice button. (If you press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button instead of a voice button or only waiting (not press any keys) a short while, the GRAND PIANO 1 demo tune will begin playback.) 4. Stop the Voice demo and exit from Demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or SONG [STOP] button. NOTE For a list of the demo songs, see page 95. NOTE MIDI reception is not possible in Demo Song mode. Demo song data is not transmitted via the MIDI terminals. NOTE Demo mode cannot be engaged during User song recording (page 30) or file operations (page 36). TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In Demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE You cannot adjust the tempo of demo songs. You cannot use the part cancel function (page 18) or the song A-B repeat function (page 19) in Demo mode. NOTE On the CLP-370/340, you can demo the piano voices with various effects by pressing the [VARIATION] button, then pressing the desired voice button. Refer to the “Piano Voice Demo Description” on page 95 for the complete list of demo sounds for the piano voices with various effects. 16 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can simply listen to these songs or use them for practice (page 18). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Piano” that contains scores for the 50 piano preset songs. 3 2 -2 1 4 2 -1 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage Preset Song mode. Press the [SONG SELECT] button a few times until the “PRESET” indicator lights. 2. Play any of the 50 preset songs. 2-1 2-2 Press the [–/NO], [+/YES] buttons to select a number of the tune you want to play (the number will appear on the LED display) or select a playing method. 1 – 50: Select a preset song number and play only the song. r n d: Play all preset songs continuously in random order. ALL: Play all preset songs in sequence. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Adjust the Volume You can play the keyboard along with the preset song. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. Adjust the Tempo 3. Stop playback. TERMINOLOGY Song: Performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. NOTE Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume. You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [▼] and [▲] buttons. NOTE Preset Song mode cannot be engaged while the unit is in Demo Song mode (page 16) or during song playback (page 44), User song recording (page 30), or file operations (page 36). NOTE This produces a relative tempo variation, with a range from “–50” through “0” to “50” at maximum; the range will differ depending on the selected song. Playback will stop automatically when the selected preset song has finished. To stop the song during playback (or continuous playback), press the SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. • To play back another song continuously, see procedure 2 above. 4. Exit from Preset Song mode. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to exit Preset Song mode. The indicator turns off, and the unit returns to normal play mode. How to use the practice functions You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (part cancel function) and continuously repeat a specified phrase within a song (song A-B repeat function). For more information, see pages 18–19. You can adjust the Brilliance control (page 22) and Reverb type (page 22) that is applied to preset song playback. You can change the Effect settings (page 23) and Touch sensitivity (page 24) for the keyboard voice you play. NOTE The default tempo “0” is automatically selected whenever a new preset song is selected, or when playback of a new preset song begins during “ALL” or “r n d” playback. NOTE When you select a different song (or a different song is selected during chained playback), appropriate reverb and effect types will be selected accordingly. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 17 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs (Part Cancel Function) The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual parts. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as desired, in order to practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [RIGHT] and the left-hand part is played by [LEFT]. ENGLISH 3 1 2 CLP-370 Procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] button to turn off the corresponding part. When you first select a song, both [RIGHT] and [LEFT] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. • Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles playback between on and off. NOTE The Preset Song Part Cancel function cannot be used during “ALL” or “r n d” (page 17) playback. NOTE The parts can be turned on or off even during playback. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) When the Sync Start function is engaged, playback of the selected preset song will begin automatically as soon as you start playing on the keyboard. To engage the Sync Start function, simultaneously hold down the SONG [STOP] and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. Left Pedal Play/Pause The left pedal can be assigned to play and pause preset song playback via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. 18 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever a new song is selected. Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs A-B Repeat for 50 Preset Songs The A-B Repeat function can be used to continuously repeat a specified phrase within a preset song. Combined with the Part Cancel function described on page 18, this provides an excellent way to practice difficult phrases. 2 1 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Specify the beginning (A) and the end (B) of the phrase, and start practicing. Select and play a preset song, then press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION] button at the beginning of the phrase you want to repeat. This sets the “A” point ( play). NOTE The A-B Repeat function cannot be used during “ALL” or “r n d” (page 17) playback. will appear on the dis- NOTE To specify the end (B) of the phrase, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button a second time at the end of the phrase. • To set the “A” point at the very beginning of the song, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button before starting playback. • You can have the B point automatically be set to the song’s end, by setting the A point and letting the song play to the end. This sets the “B” point ( will appear on the display). At this point, repeat playback will begin between the specified A and B points. NOTE An automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase) starts at the A point of the song. 2. Stop playback. Press the SONG [STOP] button to stop playback while retaining the specified A and B points. A-B repeat playback will resume if you press the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. To cancel the A and B points, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button once. NOTE The A and B points are automatically canceled when a new song is selected. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 19 Selecting & Playing Voices Selecting & Playing Voices Selecting Voices Voice buttons ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure Select the desired voice by pressing one of the Voice buttons. Then, when you start playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider for the most comfortable listening level. NOTE To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice (page 16). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92 for more information on the characteristics of each preset voice. TERMINOLOGY Voice: On the Clavinova, a voice means a “tone” or “tonal color.” NOTE You can control the loudness of a voice by adjusting the force with which you strike the keys, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92. 20 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Using the Pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Sostenuto (Center) Pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.”      When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain.      TERMINOLOGY: Half-pedal: While playing the piano with Sustain and you want to slightly mute the sustained sound, release the damper pedal from maximum position to half position. NOTE The depth of the effect produced by the “Sustain Samples” can be adjusted via the “Sustain Sample Depth” (page 66) in Function mode. ENGLISH Damper (Right) Pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-pedal function. When DAMPER RES. is on, the Clavinova simulates the sustain sound that occurs when you press the damper pedal of a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. NOTE If the damper pedal doesn’t work, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the jack (pages 83, 86). NOTE Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft (Left) Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. NOTE The left pedal can be assigned to song play/pause operation or variation function (CLP-370/340) via the “Left Pedal Mode” described on page 66. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 21 Selecting & Playing Voices Adding Variations to the Sound — [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340)/[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[EFFECT]/ [DAMPER RES.] [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons [VARIATION] button [REVERB] button [DAMPER RES.] button ENGLISH CLP-370 [BRILLIANCE] button [EFFECT] button [VARIATION] (CLP-370/340) Lets you alter another aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 92 for more information on the characteristics of each variation. Procedure Pressing the [VARIATION] or selected voice button toggles the variation on and off. The indicator lights (ON) when [VARIATION] is enabled. [BRILLIANCE] This control can be used to change the tonality or “timbre” of the sound output. BRIGHT: NORMAL: MELLOW: Bright tone Standard tone Soft and mellow tone NOTE Normal setting = OFF TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE The left pedal can be assigned to ON or OFF the variation via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66. NOTE Normal setting = NORMAL Procedure To select a brilliance type, press the [BRILLIANCE] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicator lights in sequence each time you press the [BRILLIANCE] button). Brilliance can be selected among five types. When two adjacent indicators are lit, the type that is between the two indicated types is selected. For example, when both NORMAL and MELLOW are lit, the brilliance setting between NORMAL and MELLOW is selected. This parameter affects the entire sound of the instrument. NOTE When the BRILLIANCE is set to BRIGHT, the overall sound will be slightly louder. If the MASTER VOLUME is set at a high level the sound may become distorted. If so, lower the MASTER VOLUME level. [REVERB] This control enables you to select various digital reverb effects that would add extra depth and expression to the sound to create a realistic acoustic ambience. OFF: ROOM: HALL 1: HALL 2: STAGE: 22 When no reverb effect is selected, no REVERB indicator is lit. This setting adds a continuous reverb effect to the sound, similar to the acoustic reverberation you would hear in a room. For a “bigger” reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a small-size concert hall. For a truly spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 2 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a large concert hall. Simulates the reverb of a stage environment. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE The default reverb type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. NOTE Releasing the [REVERB] button changes the reverb type. If you have changed the reverb depth, releasing the [REVERB] button will not change the reverb type. Selecting & Playing Voices Procedure To select an reverb type, press the [REVERB] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press the [REVERB] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off. NOTE Depth 0: no effect Depth 20: maximum reverb depth [EFFECT] The [EFFECT] button allows you to select an effect to give your sound greater depth and animation. OFF: CHORUS: PHASER: TREMOLO: ROTARY SP: When no effect is selected, no EFFECT indicator is lit. A shimmering, broadening effect Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Tremolo effect Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. NOTE The default effect type (including OFF) and depth settings are different for each voice. ENGLISH Adjusting Reverb Depth Adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [REVERB] button is held. NOTE Releasing the [EFFECT] button changes the effect type. If you have changed the depth settings, releasing the [EFFECT] button will not change the effect type. Procedure To select an effect type, press the [EFFECT] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time you press the [EFFECT] button). No effect is produced when all indicators are off. Adjusting Effect Depth You can adjust the effect depth for the selected voice by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [EFFECT] button is held. NOTE Depth 0: no effect Depth 20: maximum effect depth NOTE Default depth settings are different for each voice. [DAMPER RES.] The Damper Resonance lets you hear a simulation of the sustain sound of the damper pedal on a grand piano, as you press the damper pedal and play the keyboard. This effect is applied to the entire sound of the instrument. NOTE Procedure Normal setting = ON Pressing the [DAMPER RES.] button repeatedly toggles the Damper Resonance on and off. Adjusting DAMPER RES. Depth You can adjust the Damper Resonance depth by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the [DAMPER RES.] button. The depth range is from 0 through 20. The current depth setting appears on the LED display while the [DAMPER RES.] button is held. NOTE Depth 0: no effect Depth 20: maximum depth CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 23 Selecting & Playing Voices Touch Sensitivity — [TOUCH] You can select four different types of keyboard touch sensitivity — HARD, MEDIUM, SOFT or FIXED — to match different playing styles and preferences. HARD: MEDIUM: SOFT: FIXED: Requires that the keys be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. All notes are produced at the same volume no matter how hard the keyboard is played. (No indicators are lit.) The fixed volume can be changed. NOTE This setting does not change the weight of the keyboard. NOTE Normal setting = MEDIUM NOTE ENGLISH The touch sensitivity type will become the common setting for all voices. However, the touch sensitivity settings may have little or no effect with certain voices that are not normally responsive to keyboard dynamics. (Refer to the “Preset Voice List” on page 92.) [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons [TOUCH] button CLP-370 Procedure To select a touch sensitivity type press the [TOUCH] button a few times until the indicator corresponding to the desired type lights (the indicators light in sequence each time the [TOUCH] button is pressed). No indicator is lit when “FIXED” is selected. Changing the volume when FIXED is selected When you select FIXED, you can set the volume for notes played in FIXED mode by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while you hold the [TOUCH] button. The current volume level appears on the display. The volume range is from 1 through 127. The default setting is 64. NOTE 1: minimum volume 127: maximum volume Volume range NOTE The touch volume set in FIXED mode will become the common setting for all voices. NOTE Releasing the [TOUCH] button changes the touch type. If you have changed the volume, releasing the [TOUCH] button will not change the touch type. (FIXED mode will remain selected.) 24 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Transposition — [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing a C key produces a pitch of F. In this way, you can play a song as though it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to F major. [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons CLP-370 Procedure Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] button while holding the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose down or up as required. The amount of transposition appears on the LED display while the [TRANSPOSE] button is held. The default transpose setting is “0.” ENGLISH [TRANSPOSE] button TERMINOLOGY Transposition The [TRANSPOSE] button indicator remains lit when a transpose setting other than “0” is selected. If a value other than “0” is selected, the [TRANSPOSE] button can be switched the transpose function ON or OFF at any time. Transpose: Change the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. NOTE The transposition range: –12: –12 semitones (down one octave) 0: normal pitch 12: 12 semitones (up one octave) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 25 Selecting & Playing Voices Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. 1 2 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage Dual mode. NOTE (CLP-370/340) Press two voice buttons at the same time (or press one voice button while holding another). The voice indicators of both selected voices will light when Dual mode is active. • According to the voice numbering priority shown in the diagram on the right, the lower value voice number will be designated as Voice 1 (the other voice will be designated as Voice 2). Voice numbering priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 The Function mode provides access to a number of other Dual mode functions, such as volume balance setting or octave setting (page 64). (If you do not set Dual mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by default.) 2. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice button. Dual and Split (page 27) modes cannot be engaged at the same time. NOTE [VARIATION] in Dual Mode (CLP-370/340) The [VARIATION] button’s indicator will light if the variation is engaged for either or both of the Dual mode voices. While Dual mode is engaged, the [VARIATION] button can be used to turn the variation for both voices on or off. To turn the variation on or off for only one of the voices, hold the voice button for the other voice and press the button of the voice for which you want to change the variation. NOTE [REVERB] in Dual Mode The reverb type assigned to Voice 1 will take priority over the other. (If the reverb is set to OFF, Voice 2 reverb type will be in effect.) NOTE [EFFECT] in Dual Mode Depending on the conditions, one effect type may take priority over the other. Depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F3 (page 64) you can adjust the depth value for each voice to your liking. 26 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Splitting the Keyboard Range and Playing Two Different Voices (Split mode) (CLP-370/340) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Voice buttons [SPLIT] button ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage Split mode. Press the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator lights. The default setting (WOOD BASS) will be selected for the left-hand voice at first. The Function mode provides access to a number of other Split mode functions (page 65). (If you make no settings for Split mode functions, the appropriate setting will be set in each voice by default.) NOTE Dual (page 26) and Split modes cannot be engaged simultaneously. 2. Specify the split point (the border between the right-and left-hand range). (The split point is initially set at the F#2 key by default. If you do not need to change the split point, skip this procedure.) You can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (the name of the current split-point key appears on the LED display while the [SPLIT] button is held). An example of split-point key display F2 NOTE A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. The split point can also be changed by simultaneously holding down the [SPLIT] button and pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. The default split point can be recalled by simultaneously holding down the [SPLIT] button and pressing both the [–/NO] and [+/ YES] buttons together. followed by a high bar if sharp F#2 NOTE The split point can also be set via Function 4 (page 65). Eb2 followed by a low bar if flat A -1 C1 C2 F#2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 Normal setting=F#2 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 27 Selecting & Playing Voices 3. Select a voice for the right hand. Press a voice button. 4. Select a voice for the left hand. Press the corresponding voice button while holding the [SPLIT] button. (The indicator of the Left Voice button will light while the [SPLIT] button is pressed.) To turn the variation on or off for the split voice, hold the [SPLIT] button and press the [VARIATION] button or the currently-selected voice button. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. NOTE [VARIATION] in Split Mode You can turn the variation on or off for Split mode voices. Normally, the voice indicator of the right voice lights in Split mode. The [VARIATION] can be used to turn the variation for the right voice on or off as required. While the [SPLIT] button is held, however, the voice indicator of the left voice lights. In this state the [VARIATION] button turns the variation for the left voice on or off. Press the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out. ENGLISH NOTE [REVERB] in Split Mode The reverb type assigned to the right voice will take priority over the other. (If the reverb of the right voice is set to OFF, the left voice’s reverb type will be in effect.) NOTE [EFFECT] in Split Mode Depending on the conditions, one effect type will take priority over the other. The depth will be decided according to the depth default value of the voice combination. However, using function F4 (page 65) you can change the depth value for each voice as you like. Effect depth setting via the panel controls (i.e. pressing the [–/NO] or [+/YES] buttons while holding the [EFFECT] button — will be applied to the right voice only. 28 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Selecting & Playing Voices Using the Metronome The Clavinova features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for practicing. 1 2 [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons CLP-370 ENGLISH [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▲▼] buttons Procedure 1. Start the metronome. The metronome sound is turned on by pressing the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. The beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo The tempo of the metronome and user song recorder playback (the recorder is described in the next section) can be set from 32 to 280 beats per minute by using the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons (when the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] button’s [TEMPO] indicator is lit). Adjusting the time signature The time signature (beat) of the metronome can be set by using the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons while holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. You can set the beat from 0 to 15. The current setting Beat appears on the LED display while you are holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. A beat setting of “0” plays a low click sound for all beats, while a setting of “1” plays a high click sound for all beats; other beat settings play a high click for the first beat in a measure and a low click for all following beats. NOTE If the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button’s [TEMPO] indicator is not lit, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to light the [TEMPO] indicator. NOTE The volume of the metronome can be adjusted via the Metronome Volume function in Function mode (page 67). 2. Stop the metronome. Turn off the metronome by pressing the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 29 Recording Your Performance ENGLISH Recording Your Performance The ability to record and play back what you’ve played on the instrument can be an effective practice aid. You can, for example, record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Or, since you can record up to two parts separately, you could record the left-and right-hand parts separately, or record both parts of a duet and hear how they sound when played back. The two-part Song Recorder on the instrument allows the recording of up to three User songs (U01 – U03) to the instrument. User songs can be saved to an optional USB storage device. Recording a performance quickly This convenient and simple recording method lets you quickly record your performance without specifying the recording parts — useful, for example, in recording solo piano pieces. In this way, the performance is automatically recorded to right part. 24 4 3 CLP-370 CAUTION To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s): If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song. Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data. You cannot record the performance to the connected USB storage device directly. The recorded songs are saved to the instrument automatically. If you want to save data to the device, perform the Save operation (page 37) after stopping recording. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. The Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. 30 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Procedure 1. Make all the initial settings. Before you begin to record, select the voice you want to record (or voices if you will be using Dual or Split mode). Make any other desired settings (reverb, effect, etc.) as well. You might also want to set the volume. You can also adjust the playback volume using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. 2. Engage Record Ready mode. NOTE When the instrument is in Demo Song mode or during a file operation, Record mode cannot be engaged. Press the [REC] button to engage Record Ready mode. This automatically selects an empty song for recording and makes the RIGHT part active. If an empty song does not exist, Song U01 will be selected. Recording does not actually start yet. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will flash at the current METRONOME tempo setting. You can turn on the metronome in this step, and adjust the tempo by using the If you have selected the LEFT part previously in the same song, the LEFT part will automatically be made active when pressing the [REC] button in step 2. ENGLISH NOTE Recording capacity You can record up to a maximum three songs, or up to a maximum of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in each song on the instrument depending on pedal usage and other factors. NOTE [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons. (Range: 32 – 280) Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button again. 3. Start recording. Recording will begin automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The current measure’s number will appear on the display while recording. NOTE If the metronome was on when you started recording, you’ll be able to keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound will not be recorded. NOTE For more recording information, see page 34. NOTE The left pedal can be assigned to start recording via the “Left Pedal Mode” function described on page 66. 4. Stop recording. Press either [REC] or SONG [STOP] button to stop recording. When recording is stopped, dashes appear in the display in succession to indicate that the recorded data is being saved to the instrument automatically. After the data is saved, the song name (U01 – U03) appears in the display. The recorded part’s indicator will glow green to indicate that it now contains data. (Record mode is disengaged automatically.) NOTE If the memory becomes full during recording, “FUL” will appear on the display and recording will stop automatically. (All recorded data up to that point will be retained.) CAUTION Do not turn off the power of the instrument when dashes appear in the display in succession. Doing so may delete all song data in the instrument, including external songs (page 43). CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 31 Recording Your Performance Playing back a recorded song Procedure 1. Play back the recorded performance. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. ENGLISH 2. Stop the performance. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button. Re-recording a previously recorded song This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices (and other settings) for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 1 on page 31 if you wish to change the previous settings. For more information of the recorded data see page 34. 2. Re-engage Record Ready mode. Press the [REC] button, again. The selected part’s indicator lights in red. Follow the procedure from Step 3 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31 to re-record. Deleting a selected part Pressing the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start recording, then pressing the SONG [STOP] button to stop recording will erase all previously recorded data on the selected part. 32 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE If you want to change the tempo, reverb type, or effect type when re-recording a part or when recording to another part, do so after you engage Record Ready mode. You cannot re-record in the middle of a song. Recording Your Performance Recording to RIGHT/LEFT parts This lets you record the right and left parts separately. Since you can record the left part while playing back the right, this is useful for recording both parts of a duet. NOTE Procedure Part button indications Off: Contains no data On (green): Contains data On (red): Part is enabled for recording 1. Make all the initial settings. 2. Select a song to record. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to light “USER” indicator on, then press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song for recording. Recording capacity You can record up to a maximum three songs, or up to a maximum of about 100KB (11,000 Notes) in each song on the instrument depending on pedal usage and other factors. ENGLISH NOTE Same as step 1 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31. NOTE CAUTION To avoid erasing previously recorded song(s): If the song contains data, the part indicator lights up green when you select a song. Note that recording new data on this part will erase the existing data. 3. Engage Record Ready mode. If the metronome was on when you started recording, you’ll be able to keep time with the metronome while recording, but the metronome sound will not be recorded. NOTE Press the [REC] button and press the [RIGHT]/[LEFT] button to engage Record Ready mode. Recording does not actually start yet. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will flash at the current METRONOME tempo setting. Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button again. 4. Start and stop recording. Same as step 3 – 4 in “Recording a performance quickly” on page 31. If you want to change the time signature, make sure to change it before entering Record Ready mode. If you want to change the tempo, reverb type, or effect type when rerecording a part or when recording to another part, do so after entering Record Ready mode. The Time Signature of a recorded song cannot be changed. If you want to record a song with another Time Signature, first save a song to USB storage (see page 37), and delete the recorded both parts of the song (see page 32, Deleting a selected part), then set the desired time signature, and begin a new recording. NOTE If you don’t want to hear the previously recorded part while you record (for example, when you want to record a song different from what you recorded on the previous part), press the playback part button before pressing the [REC] button so that its indicator is turned off. For more information on recording, see page 34. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 33 Recording Your Performance ENGLISH The user song recorder records the following data: Data in addition to the notes and voices you play is recorded. This data includes “Individual Parts” and “Entire Song.” See below. Individual Parts • Notes played • Voice selection • [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340) • Pedal (Damper/Soft/Sostenuto) • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] depth • Dual mode voices • Dual balance (F3) • Dual detune (F3) • Dual octave shift (F3) • Split mode voices (F4: CLP-370/340) • Split balance (F4: CLP-370/340) • Split octave shift (F4: CLP-370/340) Entire Song • Tempo • Time signature (beat) • [REVERB] type (including OFF) • [EFFECT] type (including OFF) 34 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Performance Changing the Initial Settings (Data recorded at the beginning of a song) The initial settings (data recorded at the beginning of a song) can be changed after the recording. For example, after recording, you can change the voice to create a different ambience or adjust the song tempo to your taste. You can change the following initial settings. ENGLISH Individual Parts • Voice selection • [VARIATION] ON/OFF (CLP-370/340) • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] depth • Dual mode voices • Split mode voices (CLP-370/340) • Damper/soft pedal depth Entire Song • Tempo • [REVERB] type (including OFF) • [EFFECT] type (including OFF) 1. Change the settings via the panel controls. For example, if you wish to change the recorded voice from [E. PIANO 1] to [E. PIANO 2], press the [E. PIANO 2] button. 2. Engage Record mode and select a part to change the initial settings. The indicator glows red. (Data shared by two parts can be changed via either part.) CAUTION Be careful not to press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button or a key on the keyboard, either of which will start recording and erase all previously-recorded data on the selected part. 3. Press the [REC] button to exit Record mode. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 35 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device You can handle User songs (save, load, and delete) with a USB storage device. You can also format the device or media. ENGLISH Before using a USB device, read the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 41. NOTE For details on connecting a USB storage device, see page 73. NOTE Before handling songs with a USB storage device, make sure that the device is not protected. If the device is protected, you cannot access it. About Save and Load Save You can save three User songs in the instrument to the USB storage device as SMF song files. These songs can be saved to a “container” (or memory location) in the USB storage device. 100 containers are available — S00 – S99. Since the User songs are saved in SMF format, they can be played back on other instruments, including other Clavinovas. Memory location User song (Internal memory) NOTE If there is not enough capacity left on the USB storage device to save or export the data, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to save or export the data. Delete unwanted files from the device to make more memory available (page 39), or use another device. USB storage device NOTE Save User Song 1 (U01) SMF Song 0 (S00) User Song 2 (U02) SMF Song 1 (S01) User Song 3 (U03) SMF Song 2 (S02) The file numbers which can be handled in this instrument are 100 files. • SMF song numbers: S00 – S99 SMF Song 99 (S99) Load If you want to only play the song in the USB storage device, the following operation is not necessary. For instructions on playing the song, see “Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device” on page 45. The Load operation can be used if you want to edit the recorded song on the instrument. Data can be loaded to User Song 3 (U03). Memory location User song (Internal memory) User Song 1 (U01) USB storage device Load SMF Song 0 (S00) User Song 2 (U02) SMF Song 1 (S01) User Song 3 (U03) SMF Song 2 (S02) SMF Song 99 (S99) 36 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE The “S” indication at the top of the User file name represents “SMF.” TERMINOLOGY SMF (Standard MIDI File): The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. The SMF format for sequence files allows you to exchange song data between different sequencers. User songs recorded on the Clavinova are SMF Format 0. Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Saving a Song 1 23 1 2 CLP-370 NOTE 1. Select a User song to save. Select a User song to save by using the [SONG SELECT] and [–/NO][+/YES] buttons. 2. Select a song container in the device and save the User song. If the selected song has no data, the song will not be saved (you cannot select a container for SMF songs — S00 – S99). Confirm that the selected song has data by making sure that the indicator of [RIGHT] or [LEFT] is turned on. ENGLISH Procedure After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, press the [FILE] button (the “SAVE TO USB” indicator lights). Then, while holding the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a container (S00 – S99). After releasing the [FILE] button, “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display. Press the [+/YES] button to save the songs. The song is saved into the “USER FILES” folder and named as “USERSONGxx.MID.” Overwriting the song If you select a container which contains an SMF song, three dots appear in the display (ex., “S.0.0.”). If you do not want to overwrite the file, press the [–/NO] button when “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display and select another container. If you want to overwrite the song, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to overwrite the file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the FILE LOAD LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 3. Exit from the file operation mode. Press the [FILE] button several times to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators turn off.) Play the recorded song (see page 43). CAUTION Do not rename User files on a computer. If the file name is changed in this way, the file cannot be loaded to the instrument. NOTE If you move an SMF song from the “USER FILES” folder to the top folder using a computer, the file type will be changed — from a SMF song (S00 – S99) to an External song. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 37 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Loading a Song 13 12 CLP-370 ENGLISH Procedure CAUTION If the User file (U03) on the instrument already contains data, this operation can result in overwriting of the data. Make sure to save important data to your computer beforehand. 1. Select a song container in the device. After making sure that the USB storage device is connected to the instrument, press the [FILE] button (the “LOAD TO USER.” indicator lights). Then, while holding the [FILE] button, press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a song (S00 – S99). Data saved on the instrument can only be loaded back to the instrument. 2. Load a song to User Song (U03). “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display. Press the [+/YES] button to load a song. The file will automatically be loaded into the User Song (U03). The indication “-” moves from left to right in display, indicating that save operation is in process. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Load, Delete and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. CAUTION Do not manually change the file name on the USB storage device by using a computer; doing so will render the file unplayable or unable for loading on the instrument. CAUTION Do not turn off the power to the instrument while flashing dashes appear in the display (indicating the operation is in process). Doing so may damage the data. When loading is completed, the “End” indication appears in the display, and the song is loaded into the User Song (U03). 3. Exit from the load operation mode. Press the [FILE] button to exit the load operation mode. (The “FILE” indicators turn off.) 38 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Deleting Song Files 13 12 CLP-370 NOTE Procedure 1. Select a song file to be deleted. Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, hold the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO][+/YES] buttons to select a file to be deleted. Two types of files will be displayed in order: • Sxx....... SMF songs • xxx....... External songs (commercially available songs or songs which have been edited on a computer) 2. Delete the file. After releasing the [FILE] button, “n y (no or yes)” appears in the display. If you want to delete the file, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to delete the file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to delete the song, press the [–/NO] button. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. NOTE Only files which contain data will be displayed. ENGLISH Audition the song to be deleted before deleting. Songs cannot be played back after engaging the Delete mode. NOTE The following types of songs cannot be deleted. If you try to delete the song, “Pro” (Protected) appears in the display. • Protected songs (extension: Cxx, Exx or SME) • Disklavier Piano Soft songs NOTE For SMF songs (Sxx), the song numbers are fixed and not changed by deleting files. However, the song numbers of External songs are not fixed and may be changed by deleting External songs. 3. Exit from the file operation mode. Press the [FILE] button to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators turn off.) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 39 Handling Songs with a USB Storage Device Formatting the USB Storage Device CAUTION If data is already saved to the USB storage device, be careful not to format it. If you format the device, all the previously saved data will be deleted. 13 12 ENGLISH CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage the format mode. Press the [FILE] button. (The “DEL/ FORMAT” indicator lights.) Then, while holding the [FILE] button, simultaneously press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons. When “For” (Format) appears in the display, release the [FILE] button to display “n y” (no/yes). 2. Execute the format operation. After “n y” (no/yes) appears in the display, press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to format the device or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to format the device, press the [–/NO] button. CAUTION While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the LOAD TO USER LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 3. Exit from the format mode. Press the [FILE] button to exit the file operation mode. (The FILE indicators turn off.) 40 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Handling the USB Storage Device (USB Flash Memory/ Floppy Disk, etc.) NOTE For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Connecting USB device When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. CAUTION When connecting a USB device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal on the top panel, remove it before closing the key cover. If the key cover is closed with the USB device connected, the USB device may be damaged. Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 40). CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. ENGLISH Precautions when using the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 41 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks An optional floppy disk drive can be connected to the USB jack. (CLP-370/340) For instructions on installing a Yamaha UD-FD01 floppy disk drive, see page 91. ENGLISH The floppy disk drive lets you save original data you’ve created on the instrument to floppy disk, and allows you to load data from floppy disk to the instrument. Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Floppy Disk Compatibility • 3.5” 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Removing Floppy Disks Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Disk Drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. NOTE Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Removing a Floppy Disk • After checking that the instrument is not accessing* the floppy disk (checking that the use lamp on the floppy disk drive is off), firmly press the eject button at the upper right of the disk slot all the way in. When the floppy disk is ejected, pull it out of the drive. If the floppy disk cannot be removed because it is stuck, do not try to force it, but instead try pressing the eject button again, or try re-inserting the disk and attempt to eject it again. * Access of the disk indicates an active operation, such as recording, playback, or deletion of data. If a floppy disk is inserted while the power is on, the disk is automatically accessed, since the instrument checks whether the disk has data. CAUTION Do not remove the floppy disk or turn off the instrument itself while the disk is being accessed. Doing so may result not only in loss of data on the disk but also damage to the floppy disk drive. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data-read and -write errors. 42 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/ Write Head • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head cleaning disks. About Floppy Disks Handle floppy disks with care, and follow these precautions: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To Protect Your Data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). When saving data, make sure that the disk’s write-protect tab is set to the “overwrite” position (tab closed). Write-protect tab open (protect position) Playing Back Songs Playing Back Songs You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (pages 30 – 35) or commercially available songs. You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. Playing the voice demo tune. • 50 Piano Preset Songs .............................................................................. page 17 50 Piano Preset Songs in the instrument. • User songs in the instrument .................................................................... page 44 User songs which you recorded to the instrument by using the record function (pages 30 – 35). • External songs in the instrument .............................................................. page 44 Songs transferred from a computer (including commercially available songs and songs which have been edited on a computer). Songs can be transferred (saved) to the instrument by using the Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). The songs are saved to an area of the internal memory separate from the area for recorded User songs. Up to 255 songs can be played back on this instrument (numbers 001 – 255). • User Songs saved from the instrument in the USB storage device.......... page 45 SMF songs which have been saved from the instrument to a USB storage device (page 37). • External songs in the USB storage device................................................. page 45 Commercially available songs or songs which have been edited on a computer, etc. and stored to a USB storage device. Up to 999 songs can be played back on this instrument (numbers 001 – 999). • Internet songs from the website (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) ........... page 46 Connect the instrument to the Internet and play back from the Internet. NOTE When playing back songs containing various voices or parts (such as XG or GM songs), the voices may not sound correct or as intended on the original. You may be able to remedy this and make the playback sound more natural or appropriate by changing the Song Channel Selection setting (page 66) to “1&2,” so that only channels 1 and 2 will play back. NOTE ENGLISH • The Demo Songs ....................................................................................... page 16 If the song cannot be selected or loaded, you may need to change the Character Code setting (page 70). NOTE Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connections. However, channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier Piano Soft songs and non-protected External songs will be transmitted via the MIDI connections when the Song Channel Selection is set to “1&2” (page 66). NOTE For the USB storage device, folder directories on this instrument can be recognized up to two levels. However, the level is not displayed and song numbers 001 – 999 are displayed whichever level the song contains. NOTE Sequence formats that can be played • SMF (Standard MIDI File) Formats 0 and 1 The SMF format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. The SMF format for sequence files allows you to exchange song data between different sequencers. User songs recorded in this instrument are saved as SMF Format 0. If the metronome is being used during playback, the metronome will automatically stop when playback is stopped. NOTE If the REVERB type is changed via the panel controls during playback, both the playback and keyboard reverb effects will be changed. NOTE • ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. Among ESEQ files, Disklavier Piano Soft songs can be played back on this instrument. If the EFFECT type is changed via the panel controls during playback, the playback effect may be switched off in some cases. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 43 Playing Back Songs Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument 321 1 CLP-370 ENGLISH Procedure 1. Select the desired song. Press the [SONG SELECT] button (the USER indicator lights). Then press the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons to select a song. The User songs are displayed as “Uxx*” and External songs in the instrument are displayed as “xxx.” *The “U” indication in the User song name means “User.” The letters “xx” represent the song number. 2. Start playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The current measure number appears on the display during playback. NOTE User song playback cannot be started when the recorder contains no data. NOTE • You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting a voice from the panel. You can also enjoy playing duets with yourself by recording one part of a duet or a song for two pianos, then playing the other part while the recorded part plays back. Adjust the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to adjust the volume. Adjust the tempo You can use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously. 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the SONG [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the SONG [PLAY/ PAUSE] button. 44 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE If you have External songs in the instrument, you can use the repeat function. ALL: Play all External songs in sequence. rnd: Play all External songs continuously in random order. NOTE For instructions about how to load the songs from the computer (refer on page 76). Playing Back Songs Playing Back User Songs from a USB Storage Device 21 1 CLP-370 Procedure ENGLISH 1. Select the desired song in the USB storage device. After making sure that the device is connected to the instrument, press the [SONG SELECT] button (the USB indicator lights). Then press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] buttons to select a number of the song you want to play (the number will appear on the LED display “Sxx*” or “xxx*”), or select the playing method RND* or ALL*. *The “S” indication in the display represents “SMF” songs. The letters “xx” represent the song number. *The “xxx” indication in the display represents External songs. RND (r n d)*: Play all preset songs continuously in random order. ALL*: Play all preset songs in sequence. 2. Start and stop playback. Same as steps 2 and 3 in “Playing Back User/External Songs on the Instrument” on page 44. Useful Playback Functions Turning part playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for parts that contain data (one of [RIGHT] [LEFT] or both) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these part buttons turns off the indicators, and the data on those parts is not played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. Starting playback automatically when you start playing the keyboard (Sync Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Sync Start” function. To engage the Sync Start function, press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button while holding down the SONG [STOP] button. The SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] lamp will flash at the current tempo. (Repeat the previous operation to disengage the Sync Start function.) Playback will then start as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. This function is useful when you wish to match the timing of the beginning of the playback sound and the start of your own performance. NOTE Parts can be turned on or off before or during playback. TERMINOLOGY Sync: Synchronized; occurring at the same time Assigning the PLAY/PAUSE function to the left pedal The left pedal can also be assigned to song play/pause operation via the “Left Pedal Mode” (page 66). This is convenient for starting playback of the song anytime after you have started playing. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 45 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/ 340, CLP-S308/S306) This feature lets you directly connect your instrument to the Internet. A service in the special Yamaha website enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music. Here in this section, you may come across some unfamiliar terms and phrases related to computers and online communications. To look up the meaning of these terms, refer to the “Glossary of Internet Terms” on page 57. ENGLISH Setting up the Instrument for Internet Connection You can connect the instrument to a full-time online connection (ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped with a router. For the latest services and the specific instructions on connecting (as well as information on compatible devices etc.), refer to the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Use a computer to connect to the Internet and get online before connecting the instrument, since no modem or router settings can be made from the instrument itself. To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an Internet service or provider. Connection example 1: Connecting by cable (using a modem without router) Modem* No router capability Router Cable type LAN cable [LAN] port * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE Connect the LAN cable to the [LAN] port. NOTE Some types of modems require an optional Ethernet hub network for simultaneously connecting to several devices (such as computer, musical instrument, etc.). NOTE LAN cable 46 NOTE Depending on the Internet connection, you may not be able to connect to two or more devices (for example, a computer and the instrument), depending on the contract with the provider. This means you cannot connect with the instrument. If in doubt, check your contract or contact your provider. Due to EU regulations, users within Europe should use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent electromagnetic interference. Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Connection example 2: Connecting by cable (using a modem with router) NOTE Modem* Router capability LAN cable Connect the LAN cable to the [LAN] port. LAN cable [LAN] port ENGLISH * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Connection example 3: Wireless connection (using a wireless game adaptor) NOTE Modem* Connect the wireless game adaptor to the [LAN] port. Access point NOTE In addition to the modem or an access point, this connection requires a router. [LAN] port Wireless Game Adaptor * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. Connection example 4: Wireless connection (using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) NOTE Modem* Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Access point NOTE In addition to the modem or an access point, this connection requires a router. USB Wireless LAN Adaptor USB [TO DEVICE] terminal NOTE * Here, “modem” refers to an ADSL modem, optical network unit (ONU) or cable modem. This instrument is encrypted in WEP format only. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 47 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Connecting the Instrument to the Internet If you are using a connection by cable (using DHCP): ENGLISH You do not need to make settings on the instrument. You can access the Internet simply by connecting a router or a modem equipped with a router to the instrument via a LAN cable. Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG SELECT] button. You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56. If you are using a connection by cable (using static IP address, proxy server): You need to make Internet settings on the instrument. For instructions on making Internet settings, see “About the Internet Settings” on page 49. If you are using a wireless LAN (using a wireless game adaptor): You do not need to make settings on the instrument. You can access the Internet simply by connecting a wireless game adaptor to the instrument. * The wireless game adaptor requires settings such as the access point. For information about how to make settings, read the owner’s manual for the product you are using. Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel will be shown on the display when you select the “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG SELECT] button. You can play back the songs on the Internet using the service. For instructions on playing back songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56. If you are using a wireless LAN (using a USB wireless LAN adaptor): You need to make Internet settings from a computer; settings cannot be made on the instrument. For instructions on making Internet settings, see “About the Internet Settings” on page 49. 48 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE The most common routers and modems equipped with a router have a DHCP function. Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) About the Internet Settings You can conveniently make Internet settings for your instrument from the special Yamaha website. If you select a wireless connection using the USB wireless LAN adaptor or a connection by cable (using static IP address or proxy server), you need to make Internet settings explained as follows. NOTE You do not need to make the Internet settings here if you are using a connection by cable (using DHCP) or a wireless LAN (using a wireless game adaptor). Internet Settings Access the special Yamaha website ENGLISH When you use the Internet Direct Connection (IDC) for the first time, you should make the Internet settings according to the following illustration flow. This flow is shown to make you easily understand how to load the setting file created by the computer to your instrument. By following this flow, you won’t need to make difficult settings such as typing various data on your instrument. USB Flash Memory Save the file Create the Internet to USB flash memory setting file Load the file to the instrument For details, refer to the Yamaha webpage: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Creating the Internet Setting Files You need to create the Internet setting files on the special Yamaha webpage using your computer before making the Internet settings. For information about how to create the Internet setting files, read the instructions on the Yamaha webpage: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ NOTE The Internet settings will be backed up. Loading the Internet Setting Files This procedure lets you make Internet settings by loading the Internet setting files created on the special Yamaha webpage to the instrument. 5 1 24 3 5 CLP-370 NOTE Procedure You can create the Internet setting files (named “config.n21”) on the special Yamaha webpage. 1. Engage the Function mode. Make sure that the USB flash memory device containing the saved Internet setting file named “config.n21” is connected to the instrument, and then press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the [FUNCTION] indicator lights. NOTE The Load mode cannot be engaged while voice demo song playback is in use, when the [REC] button is on, or when user song playback is active. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 49 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) 2. Select Function F9.y (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.y (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.y (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.y (CLP-S308/S306). 3. Enter the Sub-modes Selection mode following the F9 or F8. Press the [+/YES] button to enter the Sub-modes Selection mode. ENGLISH 4. Select Function F9.1 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.1 (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.1 (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.1 (CLP-S308/S306). If you do not want to load the file, press the [–/NO] button. 5. Start loading. Press the [+/YES] button. After “n-y” appears in the display again to confirm whether you wish to load the file or not, press the [+/YES] button once more. If you do not want to load the file, press the [–/NO] button. When loading from the USB flash memory device is completed, an “End” message will appear on the display. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this display. Once loading is completed, you are now ready to access the Internet. Once the instrument is successfully connected to the Internet, currently selected channel will be shown on the display when you select “INTERNET” lamp with the [SONG SELECT] button. For instructions on listening to the songs, see “Listening to the Songs on Internet” on page 56. 50 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE If loading is not successfully completed, an “Err” message and the error code will appear alternately on the display. To return to the previous indication, press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. NOTE Error Code You can check the description for the error code on the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ NOTE Yamaha recommends that you back up the Internet setting files (page 78). Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Checking the field strength (when using a USB wireless LAN adaptor) You can check the field strength on the display, if you are using a USB wireless LAN adaptor (Connection example 4 on page 47). Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). NOTE The field strength can be displayed after making the Internet connection. NOTE Procedure 1. Select Function F9.3 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.3 ENGLISH If you are using a wireless game adaptor, the display pattern for “No wireless LAN is used” will appear. (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.3 (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.3 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button The field strength indication will appear on the display for about three seconds. Field Strength Indications Radio Status Display No signal is present. Field strength: Weak Field strength: Medium Field strength: Strong No wireless LAN is used. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 51 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Exporting the Connection Information This procedure lets you export the detailed information on the current connection as a text file to a USB flash memory device. You can check the information on your computer. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). NOTE The connection information file does not allow you to manually make Internet settings. The connection information file is set to “read only” and cannot be edited. ENGLISH Procedure 1. Select Function F9.2 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.2 (on the CLP-S308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.2 (CLP-370/ 340) or F8.2 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Turn on the Export mode. Press the [+/YES] buttons so that “OUt” appears on the display. If you do not want to export the file, press the [–/NO] button. NOTE The export mode cannot be engaged while voice demo song playback is in use, when the [REC] button is on, or when user song playback is active. NOTE If exporting has not successfully been completed, an “Err” message and the error code will appear alternately on the display. NOTE 3. Start exporting. Press the [+/YES] button. A “n y” appears in the display to confirm whether you wish to export the file or not, press the [+/YES] button again. If you do not want to export the file, press the [–/NO] button. A “n–y” message will appear on the display if a USB flash memory device contains a file with the same name as the one you are attempting to export. Press the [+/YES] button to execute the overwriting operation. Press the [–/NO] button to cancel exporting. When exporting to the USB flash memory device is completed, an “End” message will appear on the display. Press [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to exit from this display. After exporting, connect the USB flash memory device to your computer, and then open the text file named “ConnectionInfo.txt” in the root directory of the USB flash memory device to check the detailed connection information. 52 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Error Code You can check the description for the error code on the Yamaha website: http://music.yamaha.com/idc/ Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Other Internet Operations Checking the version number of the instrument You can check the version number of this instrument. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). 1. Select Function [F9.4] (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.4 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.4 (CLP370/340) or F8.4 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Call up the version number. Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display. A “PrG” message and version number “x.xx” will appear alternately on the display. ENGLISH Procedure 3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the sub-modes. 4. Exit from the Function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from function modes. Checking the version number of the LAN Port driver You can check the version number of the LAN Port driver. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). Procedure 1. Select Function F9.5 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.5 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.5 (CLP370/340) or F8.5 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Call up the version number. Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display. A “L-P” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the display. 3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes. 4. Exit from function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 53 Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Checking the version number of the USB-LAN Adapter driver You can check the version number of the USB-LAN Adapter driver. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). ENGLISH Procedure 1. Select Function F9.6 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.6 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.6 (CLP370/340) or F8.6 (CLP-S308/S306). 2. Call up the version number. Press the [+/YES] button so that the version number appears on the display. A “L-A” message and version number “x.x.x” will appear alternately on the display. 3. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes. 4. Exit from function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes. 54 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Internet Direct Connection (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Initializing Internet Settings You can initialize the Internet settings. Engage the function mode, then select the function number and enter the desired Submodes Selection mode (refer to steps 1 – 3 for similar instructions on page 49). NOTE 1. Select Function F9.7 (on the CLP-370/340) or F8.7 (on the CLPS308/S306). Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select Function F9.7 (CLP370/340) or F8.7 (CLP-S308/S306). The settings of the Internet are not initialized when using the “Initializing the data” on page 58. ENGLISH Procedure 2. Enter the Initializing mode. Press the [+/YES] buttons. A “CLr” message will appear on the display. 3. Confirm the initialization. Press the [+/YES] button. A “n y” appears in the display to confirm whether you wish to initialize or not. If you do not want to initialize, press the [–/NO] button. 4. Execute the initialization. Press again the [+/YES] buttons. Start the initialization. When initialization is completed, an “End” message appears on the display. NOTE Information of the cookies will be initialized at the same time. 5. Return to the Sub-modes Selection mode Press the [+/YES] button to exit from the Sub-modes. 6. Exit from function mode Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button to exit from the Function modes. CAUTION Initializing restores the instrument to the factory-programmed settings for all Internet settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the Internet settings before initializing. Internet Initial Settings List The following are the default settings of this instrument. DHCP ON (available) Wireless LAN OFF (no settings) Proxy server OFF (no settings) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 55 Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Yamaha provides a special website with data service that enables you to play back a range of songs (song data) in various musical genres as background music on your instrument. Before connect the instrument to the Internet, be sure to read “Internet Direct Connection” on page 46. ENGLISH 43 1 2 CLP-370 Procedure 1. Turn on the “INTERNET” lamp. Make sure that the instrument is connected to the Internet, then press the [SONG SELECT] button (the INTERNET indicator lights). The “INTERNET” access lamp flashes in red during Internet access. 2. Change the Channel. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to change the channel. The current channel setting appears on the display. NOTE You cannot select the “INTERNET” lamp while voice demo song playback is in use or the [REC] button is on. NOTE The LED displays shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. NOTE 3. Start playback. Press the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback (the “INTERNET” access lamp flashes in red during Internet access). 4. Stop playback. Press the SONG [STOP] button. You can adjust the Effect Type (page 23) that is applied to the voice you play on the keyboard as well as for the song on Internet playback. The Touch sensitivity (page 24) for the keyboard voice can also be adjusted to your liking. You can also change the Brilliance type (page 22) and Reverb type (page 22) that are applied to Internet song playback. NOTE When you select a different song (or a different song is selected during chained playback), an appropriate Reverb Type will be selected accordingly. NOTE Song data from the Internet is not transmitted via the MIDI connectors. NOTE The Synchro start function, Part settings and A-B Repeat function becomes effective after you play back the song once. 56 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Access point A device that acts as a communication hub for multiple wireless devices, and conventionally enables both wired and wireless LAN connections. Broadband An Internet connection technology/service (such as ADSL and optical fiber) that allows for high-speed, highvolume data communication. Browser The software used to search for, access, and view web pages. For this instrument, this refers to the display that shows the contents of the web pages. Cookie A system that records certain information that the user transfers when visiting a website and using the Internet. The function is similar to a preference file in a conventional computer program, in that it “remembers” certain information such as your user name and password, so you don’t have to re-enter the information each time you visit the site. DHCP This is a standard or protocol by which IP addresses and other low-level network configuration information can be dynamically and automatically assigned each time connection is made to the Internet. Download Transferring data over a network, from a larger “host” system to a smaller “client” system’s hard drive or other local storage device—much like copying files from your hard disk drive to a floppy disk. For this instrument, this refers to the process of transferring Song and other data from a website to the instrument. Home page The first page shown when opening a browser and connecting to the Internet. This phrase is also used to mean the “front screen” or top page of a website. Internet A huge network made up of networks, the Internet allows high-speed data transfer among computers, mobile phones and other devices. IP address A string of numbers assigned to each computer connected to a network, and indicating the device’s location on the network. LAN Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer network that connects a group of computers at a single location (such as an office or home) by means of a special cable. Link Location information in other sentences and images, etc. that are under buttons and character strings on a web page. When the place with the link is clicked, the page selection jumps to the relevant link. Modem A device which connects and allows data transfer between a conventional telephone line and a computer. It converts the digital signals from the computer to analog audio for sending over the phone line, and vice versa. Provider A communications business that offers Internet connection services. In order to connect to the Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider. Proxy A proxy server is a server that all computers on a local network have to go through before accessing information on the Internet. It intercepts all or designated requests to the real server to see if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the request to the real server. Proxy servers are used to improve performance and speed, and to filter requests, usually for security and to prevent unauthorized access to an internal network. Router A device for connecting multiple computer networks. For example, a router is necessary when connecting several computers in a house or office, and allow them to all access the Internet and share data. A router is usually connected between a modem and a computer, although some modems have a built-in router. Server A hardware system or computer used as a central point for a network, providing access to files and services. Site Short for “website,” this refers to the group of web pages that are opened together. For example, the collection of web pages whose addresses begin with “http://www.yamaha.com/” is referred to as the Yamaha site. SSL Short for Secure Sockets Layer, a standard for transmitting confidential data such as credit card numbers over the Internet. URL Short for Uniform Resource Locator, a string of characters used to identify and link to specific websites and pages on the Internet. A complete URL usually starts with the characters “http://.” Web page Refers to each individual page that makes up a website. WEP Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy, a security protocol for wireless networks. WEP protects communication contents from being intercepted. Wireless LAN A LAN connection that allows data transfer through a wireless, cable-free connection. Wireless Game Adaptor (Wireless Ethernet Converter or Bridge) Device that allows easy wireless connection with digital consumer electronic devices, printers, and game machines, etc. equipped with [LAN] ports. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Glossary of Internet Terms 57 Listening to the Songs on Internet (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Initializing the data CAUTION When you initialize the data, all panel settings and song data will be erased and reset to the default settings. Yamaha recommends you that you back up the data before initializing (refer on page 78). ENGLISH Turn off the power to the instrument. Then turn the power on while holding the C7 key (highest key). 58 CAUTION Do not turn off the power to this instrument while data in internal memory is being initialized (in other words, while the “CLr” indication is shown). Doing so may corrupt the all data on the instrument. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch or selecting a scale, etc. The following parameters are available. The CLP-370/340 has nine main functions, and the CLP-330 has seven main functions, and the CLP-S308/S306 has eight main functions. Some of these main functions consist of a set of sub-modes. Function Sub-Mode CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330 CLP-S308/ S306 Reference page F1 F1 F1 62 Fine tuning of the pitch — Selecting a scale Scale F2.1 F2.1 F2.1 63 Base Note F2.2 F2.2 F2.2 63 Dual Balance F3.1 F3.1 F3.1 64 Dual Detune F3.2 F3.2 F3.2 64 Voice 1 Octave Shift F3.3 F3.3 F3.3 64 Voice 2 Octave Shift F3.4 F3.4 F3.4 64 Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.5 F3.5 F3.5 64 Voice 2 Effect Depth F3.6 F3.6 F3.6 64 Reset F3.7 F3.7 F3.7 64 Split Point F4.1 — — 65 Split Balance F4.2 — — 65 Right Voice Octave Shift F4.3 — — 65 Left Voice Octave Shift F4.4 — — 65 Right Voice Effect Depth F4.5 — — 65 Left Voice Effect Depth F4.6 — — 65 Damper Pedal Range F4.7 — — 65 Dual mode functions Split mode functions Other Functions Reset F4.8 — — 65 Left Pedal Mode F5.1 F4.1 F4.1 66 Soft Pedal Effect Depth F5.2 F4.2 F4.2 66 Sustain Sample Depth F5.3 — — 66 Keyoff Sample Volume F5.4 — — 66 Song Channel Selection F5.5 F4.3 F4.3 66 F6 F5 F5 67 Metronome volume — MIDI Functions MIDI Transmit Channel Selection F7.1 F6.1 F6.1 67 MIDI Receive Channel Selection F7.2 F6.2 F6.2 68 Local Control ON/OFF F7.3 F6.3 F6.3 68 Program Change ON/OFF F7.4 F6.4 F6.4 68 Control Change ON/OFF F7.5 F6.5 F6.5 68 Panel/Status Transmit F7.6 F6.6 F6.6 69 Initial Setup Send F7.7 F6.7 F6.7 69 Voice F8.1 F7.1 F7.1 70 MIDI F8.2 F7.2 F7.2 70 Tuning F8.3 F7.3 F7.3 70 Others F8.4 F7.4 F7.4 70 — F8.5 F7.5 F7.5 70 Backup Functions Character Code CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Parameter List 59 Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330 CLP-S308/ S306 Reference page Loading Internet Setting File F9.1 — F8.1 49 Exporting The Connection Information F9.2 — F8.2 52 Checking the Field Strength F9.3 — F8.3 51 Program Version Program Version F9.4 — F8.4 53 LAN Functions LAN port driver version F9.5 — F8.5 53 USB-LAN Adapter version F9.6 — F8.6 54 Initializing Internet Settings F9.7 — F8.7 55 Function ENGLISH LAN Settings Sub-Mode Basic Procedure in Function Mode Follow the steps below to use the functions. (If you become lost while using a function, return to this page and read the basic procedure.) 1 5 2 4 34 CLP-370 Procedure 1. Engage the Function mode. Press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its [FUNCTION] indicator lights. will appear on the display. (The indication of “ the status of the unit and usage.) ” varies depending on 2. Select a function. Use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired function from F1 – F9 (CLP-370/340), F1 – F7 (CLP-330), F1 – F8 (CLP-S308/S306). NOTE Functions cannot be selected during Demo/Song Select/ file operation mode or when the user song recorder is in operation. NOTE To exit the Function mode, press [FUNCTION] button any time. 3. Use the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons. If the function does not include sub-modes, jump to Step 4. If the function includes sub-modes, press the [+/YES] button once to enter the respective sub-mode. 60 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE After you select the function, the current setting will be displayed when the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button is pressed for the first time. Detailed Settings — [FUNCTION] 4. Operate the desired function using the following two buttons. [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] Operation Example 1 (F1. Fine tuning of the pitch) LED indication Engage the Function mode. Select a desired function. LED indication ENGLISH Selects the desired function/sub-mode. [–/NO] or [+/YES] After you select the desired function or sub-mode, set the ON/OFF, select the type, or change the value, accordingly. Depending on the setting, the default setting (which is used when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova) is recalled by pressing the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons simultaneously. Change the value. Operation Example 2 (F3.1 “Dual Balance”) LED indication Engage the Function mode. Select a desired function. LED indication Engage the respective sub-mode. Select a desired sub-mode. LED indication Change the value. 5. After using the function, exit the function mode. To exit the Function mode, press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that its [TEMPO] indicator lights. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 61 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] About Each Function NOTE F1. Fine Tuning of the Pitch You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. 1. Engage the Function mode and select . ENGLISH 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to lower or raise the pitch of the A3 key in approximately 0.2 Hz increments. You can also tune in about 1Hz steps (in any mode other than Function mode). To tune down or up, respectively, in approximately 1 Hz increments: Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button. To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at the left end) or A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons simultaneously. C#0 A#-1 The value appears two-digit number and one decimal place. Ex. 440.2Hz is shown as 40.2 on the display. C0 Display Value 440.0 Setting range: 440.2 427.0 – 453.0 (Hz) 440.4 Normal setting: 440.6 440.0 (Hz) 440.8 TERMINOLOGY Hz (Hertz): This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. NOTE You can also use the keyboard to set the pitch (in any mode other than Function mode). To tune up (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and C0 keys (three white keys at the left end) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. To tune down (in about 0.2Hz steps): Hold the A -1, B -1 and C#0 keys (two white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. To restore standard pitch: Hold the A -1,B -1, C0 and C#0 (three white keys and a black key) simultaneously and press any key between C3 and B3. Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest (farthest left) key on the keyboard corresponds to A -1, and the highest (farthest right) key to C7. During the procedure described above, the display indicates a value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display returns to the previous indication. 62 C3 B3 B -1 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual A -1 During the procedure described above, the display indicates a value in Hz < … >. After the procedure, the display returns to the previous indication. Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience these tunings with the Clavinova. Equal Temperament 1. Engage the Function mode and select 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the scale function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to select the number of the desired tuning. Sub-mode F2.1: Scale Setting range: One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently the most popular piano tuning scale. Pure Major/Pure Minor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is based on the interval of a perfect 5th. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. Mean Tone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. The scale became popular during the late 16th century through the late 18th century, and was used by Handel. Werckmeister/Kirnberger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are often used today to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. . 1: Equal Temperament 2: Pure Major 3: Pure Minor 4: Pythagorean 5: Mean Tone 6: Werckmeister 7: Kirnberger ENGLISH F2. Selecting a Scale Normal setting: 1: Equal Temperament F2.2: Base Note If you select a scale other than Equal Temperament, you need to specify the root. (You can specify the root note with Equal Temperament selected, but it is not effective. The base note setting is effective for tunings other than the Equal Temperament tuning.) Setting range: Normal setting: • Root indication example (F) (G) followed by a high bar if sharp  (A ) followed by a low bar if flat CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 63 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F3. Dual Mode Functions You can set various parameters for Dual mode to optimize the settings for the songs you play, such as adjusting the volume balance between two voices. Dual mode function settings are set individually for each voice combination. ENGLISH 1. Select the voices in Dual mode, then engage the Function mode and select . 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Dual mode function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] button to assign values. NOTE If Dual mode is not engaged, will appear instead of and you will be unable to select Dual mode functions. In this case, you can switch to the Dual mode by selecting two voices. F3.1: Dual Balance Setting range: –1, 0, 1 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for Voice 1 and Voice 2 independently. Depending on which voices you combine in Dual mode, the combination may sound better if one of the voices is shifted up or down an octave. F3.5: Voice 1 Effect Depth F3.6: Voice 2 Effect Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for Voices 1 and 2 for Dual mode. (The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the [EFFECT] is ON. Function mode must be exited before the [EFFECT] can be turned ON.) F3.7: Reset Setting range: 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an equal balance between the two Dual mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of Voice 2 in relation to Voice 1, and settings above “10” increase the volume of Voice 1 in relation to Voice 2.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. You can set one voice as the main voice, and another voice as a softer, mixed voice. F3.2: Dual Detune -20 – 0 – 20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) NOTE The available setting range is wider in the lower range (± 60 cents for A -1), and narrower in the higher range (± 5 cents for C7). (100 cents equal one semitone.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. Detune Voice 1 and Voice 2 for Dual mode to create a thicker sound. 64 F3.4: Voice 2 Octave Shift • “Voice 1” and “Voice 2” are explained on page 26. Sub-mode Setting range: F3.3: Voice 1 Octave Shift CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual This function resets all Dual mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. NOTE SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the Dual mode functions by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the two Dual mode voice buttons. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for Split mode. By changing the split point or other setting, you can optimize the settings for the songs you play. 1. Select the voices in Split mode, then engage the Function mode and select . 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the Split mode function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] [+/ YES] button to assign values. NOTE If Split mode is not engaged, will appear instead of and you will be unable to select Split mode functions. Also note that you must exit Function mode before you can engage Split mode. Sub-mode F4.1: Split Point Setting range: The entire keyboard  Normal setting: F 2 Set the point on the keyboard that separates the right and left-hand sections (split point). The pressed key is included in the left-hand range. • Instead of pressing the [–/NO] [+/YES] buttons, you can engage the split point by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. • If Function mode is not engaged, you can change the split point to any other key by pressing the key while holding the [SPLIT] button (page 27). • An example of a key name indication for a split point (F2) followed by a low bar if flat F4.2: Split Balance Setting range: F4.3: Right Voice Octave Shift F4.4: Left Voice Octave Shift Setting range: –1, 0, 1 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps for the Right Voice and Left Voice independently. Make a setting depending on the note range of the songs you play. You can make this setting for each combination of voices individually. F4.5: Right Voice Effect Depth F4.6: Left Voice Effect Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: Different for each voice combination These functions make it possible to individually set the depth of the effect for the left and right Split mode voices. The effect depth settings cannot be changed unless the [EFFECT] is ON. You must exit Function mode before you can turn on an [EFFECT]. You can make this setting for each combination of voices individually. F4.7: Damper Pedal Range Setting range: ALL (for both voices) 1 (for the right Voice) 2 (for the left Voice) Normal setting: ALL The Damper Pedal Range function determines whether the damper pedal affects the right voice, the left voice, or both the left and right voices in Split mode. F4.8: Reset This function resets all Split mode functions to their default values. Press the [+/YES] button to reset the values. (G2) followed by a high bar if sharp The volume level of the two voices combined in Split mode can be adjusted as required. You can make this setting for each combination of voices individually. ENGLISH F4. (CLP-370/340) Split Mode Functions 0 – 20 (A setting of “10” produces an equal balance between the two Split mode voices. Settings below “10” increase the volume of the left voice in relation to the right voice, and settings above “10” increase the volume of the right voice in relation to the left voice.) Normal setting: Different for each voice combination. NOTE SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to Split mode functions by pressing the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button while holding the [SPLIT] button. To exit Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 65 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F5. (CLP-370/340) / F4. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Other Functions This section provides a variety of other functions, including letting you assign the operation of the left pedal to one of several modes, and allowing you to select specific song channels for playback. ENGLISH 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the other functions’ sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to select the desired pedal function or assign the values. Sub-mode F5.1 (CLP-370/340)/F4.1 Left Pedal Mode (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Setting range: 1. Soft Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing. 2. Song Play/Pause This mode allows you to start or pause song playback. In this mode, the Left Pedal functions in the same manner as the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button on the panel. 3. Variation (CLP-370/340) This mode enables you to switch the Voice’s variation on or off. In this mode, the left pedal functions in the same manner as the [VARIATION] button on the panel. Normal setting: 1 (Soft Pedal) F5.2 (CLP-370/340)/F4.2 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Soft Pedal Effect Depth Setting range: 1 – 5 Normal setting: 3 This function sets the depth of the soft pedal effect. 66 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual F5.3 (CLP-370/340) Sustain Sample Depth Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 12 The GRAND PIANO 1 voice features special “Sustain Samples” that recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed. This function lets you adjust the depth of this effect. F5.4 (CLP-370/340) Keyoff Sample Volume Setting range: 0 – 20 Normal setting: 10 You can adjust the volume of the keyoff sound (the subtle sound produced when the keys are released) for voices [GRAND PIANO1], [HARPSICHORD], [E.CLAVICHORD] (including their variations). F5.5 (CLP-370/340)/F4.3 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Song Channel Selection Setting range: ALL, 1&2 Normal setting: ALL The setting here only affects Disklavier Piano Soft songs, and non-protected External songs. You can specify which song channels will play back on this instrument. When “ALL” is selected, channels 1 – 16 will be played back. When “1&2” is selected, only channels 1 and 2 will be played back, while channels 3 – 16 will be transmitted via MIDI. Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] You can change the volume of the metronome sound. Use this function to adjust the metronome volume. 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Use the [–/NO] and [+/YES] buttons to set the metronome volume as required. Setting range: 1 – 20 Normal setting: 10 NOTE SHORTCUT: You can jump directly to the metronome functions (CLP-370/ 340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) by pressing the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION] button while holding the METRONOME [ON/OFF] button. To exit the Function mode, you still need to press the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION] button so that the TEMPO indicator lights up. F7. (CLP-370/340) / F6. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Functions You can make detailed adjustments to MIDI settings. For more information about MIDI, see the “About MIDI” section (page 72). All MIDI settings described below will affect the MIDI signal in and out of the USB [TO HOST] connector. 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the MIDI function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/ FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to set a selected parameter. ENGLISH F6. (CLP-370/340) / F5. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Metronome Volume Sub-mode F7.1: (CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Transmit Channel Selection In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. Setting range: 1 – 16, OFF (not transmitted) Normal setting: 1 NOTE In Dual mode, Voice 1 data is transmitted on its specified channel. In Split mode (CLP-370/340), right voice data is transmitted on its specified channel. In Dual mode, Voice 2 data is transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In Split mode (CLP-370/340), left voice data is transmitted on the next greater channel number relative to the specified channel. In either mode, no data is transmitted if the transmit channel is set to “OFF.” NOTE Song data is not transmitted via the MIDI connections. However, channels 3 – 16 of Disklavier Piano Soft songs, and non-protected External songs will be transmitted via the MIDI connections depending on the Song Channel Selection setting (page 66). CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 67 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F7.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI Receive Channel Selection F7.4: (CLP-370/340)/F7.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Program Change ON/OFF In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer. This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova receives MIDI data. Setting range: ALL, 1&2, 1 – 16 Normal setting: ALL Normally the instrument will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly-numbered voice to be selected on the corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not change). The instrument will normally also send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly-numbered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers. This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be selected on the instrument without affecting the external MIDI device. ENGLISH NOTE ALL: “Multi-timbre” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception of different parts on all 16 MIDI channels, enabling the Clavinova to play multi-channel song data received from F7.6 (CLP-370/340)/ F6.6 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) or sequencer. 1&2: “1&2” Receive mode. This allows simultaneous reception on channels 1 and 2 only, enabling the Clavinova to play 1 and 2 channel song data received from a music computer or sequencer. NOTE Program change and other like channel messages received will not affect the instrument’s panel settings or the notes you play on the keyboard. NOTE No MIDI reception occurs when Demo mode is engaged or during file operations. F7.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Local Control ON/OFF “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control On,” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned OFF, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN terminal. Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON NOTE For information on program change numbers for each of the Instrument’s voices, Refer to MIDI Data Format on the web site. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON F7.5: (CLP-370/340)/F7.5: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Control Change ON/OFF Normally the CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the voice on the corresponding channel to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice is not affected). The CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 also transmits MIDI control change information when the pedal or other appropriate controls are operated. This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission so that, for example, the CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306’s pedal and other controls can be operated without affecting an external MIDI device. NOTE For information on control changes that can be used with the CLP370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306, refer to the MIDI Data Format in our manual library at the following website. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: ON 68 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F7.6: (CLP-370/340)/ F7.6: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Panel/Status Transmit F7.7: (CLP-370/340)/F7.7: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Initial Setup Send This function causes all the current instrument panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal. This function lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. By transmitting the panel settings and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to the actual performance data, the instrument will be automatically restored to the same settings when the performance is played back. You can also use this function to change the settings of a connected tone generator to the same settings as the instrument. Procedure 1. Set up the panel controls as desired. 2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data. 3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP- 370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330). 4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. NOTE For a list of the “Panel Data Contents” transmitted by this function, refer to our manual library at the following website. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ NOTE Receiving the transmitted data: 1. Connect the Clavinova via MIDI to the device to which the setup data was transmitted previously. 2. Start sending the setup data from the device. The Clavinova automatically receives the setup data, which will be reflected in the panel settings. (For the data to be accepted, the Clavinova that receives the setup data should be the same model as the one that transmitted the setup data to the sequencer.) Procedure 1. Set up the panel controls as desired. 2. Connect the Clavinova to a sequencer via MIDI, and set up the sequencer so it can receive the setup data. 3. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP- 370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330). 4. Press the [+/YES] button to transmit the panel/status data. ENGLISH TERMINOLOGY Setup Data: Data that contains a set of panel settings for the Clavinova. will appear on the LED display when the data has been successfully transmitted. The following data can be sent. • Voice selection • [REVERB] type • [REVERB] depth • [EFFECT] type • [EFFECT] depth • Split point • Tuning (F1) • Dual detune (F3.2) NOTE For more information on transmitting and receiving setup data via MIDI, refer to the owner’s manual for the connected MIDI device. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 69 Detailed Settings – [FUNCTION] F8. (CLP-370/340) / F7. (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Backup Functions TERMINOLOGY ENGLISH Backup: You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and reverb type, so that they will not be lost when you turn off the power to the Clavinova. If the backup function is turned on, the settings at power off are effective. If the backup function is turned off, the settings in memory are erased when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial settings) will be used. (The factory setting default list is found on page 98.) However, the backup settings themselves, the contents of the user song recorder memory, character code settings and internet settings are always backed up. You can turn the backup function on or off for each function group (each of the following sub-mode functions). 1. Engage the Function mode and select (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP330). 2. Press the [+/YES] button to engage the backup function’s sub-mode, then use the [TEMPO/FUNCTION ▼, ▲] buttons to select the desired sub-mode. Press the [–/NO] or [+/YES] button to turn the backup function on or off. Sub-mode F9.1: (CLP-370/340)/F8.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Voice Description of sub-modes F9.1: (CLP-370/340)/F7.1: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Voice • Voice (Keyboard, Dual, and Split <CLP-370/340>) • Dual (ON/OFF, Voice, and Dual Functions for each voice combination) • Split (CLP-370/340) (ON/OFF, Voice, and Split Functions for each voice combination) • Reverb (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) • Effect (ON/OFF, Type, and Depth for each voice) • Variation (CLP-370/340) (for each voice) • Touch Sensitivity (including the FIXED volume) • Metronome (Beat, Volume < (CLP-370/340)/ (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) settings>) F9.2: (CLP-370/340)/F7.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI The MIDI functions ( <CLP-370/340>/ <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings) (expect for the F7.6 and F7.7 <CLP-370/340>/ and <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330>) F9.3: (CLP-370/340)/F7.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Tuning • Transpose • Tuning ( settings) • Scale (including base note) ( settings) F9.4: (CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Others • Other functions ( <CLP-370/340>/ <CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330> settings) • BRILLIANCE setting • DAMPER RES. ON/OFF and Depth F9.2: (CLP-370/340)/F8.2: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) MIDI F9.3: (CLP-370/340)/F8.3: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Tuning F9.4: (CLP-370/340)/F8.4: (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Others Setting range: ON/OFF Normal setting: Voice: OFF MIDI – Others: ON F8.5 (CLP-370/340)/ F7.5 (CLP-S308/S306, CLP-330) Character Code If the song cannot be loaded, you may need to change the character code setting. Setting range: Int (English)/JA (Japanese) Normal setting: Int F9. (CLP-370/340)/ F8. LAN Settings (CLP-S308/S306) For details on how to set the LAN, see on pages 46 – 53, 58. 70 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Connections Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may result. CLP-370/340/330 SELECT IN L/L+R 5 CLP-370/340 only 6 4 3 TO DEVICE TO HOST R USB TO DEVICE USB CLP-370/340 only ENGLISH OUT MIDI L/L+R AUX IN 1 On the left of the panel R 2 AUX OUT THRU Show the jacks as seen when viewed from below the instrument. 3 CLP-370/340 only CLP-S308/S306 Left Right 5 4 2 1 6 1 AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks You can connect these jacks to a Keyboard amplifier system to monitor your playing. Refer to the diagram below and use cables to make the connections. The Master volume affects the AUX OUT signal. If you want to turn off the sound of the internal speakers, use the speaker switch (page 15). NOTE Use cables and plugs with no resistance. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova Keyboard amplifier AUX OUT R NOTE Do not input the sound from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. This may cause a feedback loop, and the output sound may be excessively loud. L/L+R AUX OUT AUX IN Phone plug Phone plug NOTE If you want to take a mono signal via the AUX OUT jack, connect a cable to the [L/L+R] jack. Cable The sound via the internal speakers and headphones is set to the proper condition automatically (see below). Speakers sound Speakers do not sound No plugs to connected to AUX OUT jacks Plugs connected to AUX OUT jacks Speakers On Speakers Normal (Headphones Switch) Speakers Off Speakers On Speakers Normal (Headphones Switch) Speakers Off Headphones connected Optimum equalization for speakers applied Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Headphones not connected Optimum equalization for speakers applied Optimum equalization for speakers applied Flat Flat Flat Flat CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 71 Connections 2 AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables to make the connections. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. NOTE The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting affect the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [BRILLIANCE], [REVERB], and [EFFECT] settings do not. NOTE Clavinova Phone plug (standard) R L/L+R AUX IN ENGLISH If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack. OUTPUT AUX IN Phone plug (standard) Tone Generator Audio cable Plug shape depends on the device. AUX IN Phone plug (standard) LINE OUT Audio cable Tone Generator 3 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Connection to a USB storage device” on page 73. 4 USB [TO HOST] terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 75 for more information. 5 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] terminal as it is. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/ reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. 6 [LAN] terminal (CLP-370/340, CLP-S308/S306) Connect to the internet (see page 46). 72 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual NOTE There are two different types of USB terminals on the instrument: USB [TO DEVICE] and USB [TO HOST]. Take care not to confuse the two terminals and the corresponding cable connectors. Be careful to connect the proper plug in the proper direction. NOTE MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. NOTE Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. Refer to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the Data Format on the website. For information on how to access and obtain the Data Format list, see page 3. Direct URL: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Connections Connection to a USB storage device By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device with a standard USB cable, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. Compatible USB storage devices The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice, or visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE CD-ROM drive Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. NOTE Do not use a non-ID SmartMedia card. NOTE CAUTION Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the “LOAD TO USER” LED flash stops), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either devices. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. Connection to a USB storage device The CLP-370/340 has two USB [TO DEVICE] terminals; one on the left of the panel and one on the terminal at the bottom. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal A Select the desired terminal Number of USB storage devices Only one USB storage device can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. This instrument can recognize only a single drive in a USB storage device. If one storage device contains more than one drive, only one drive will be automatically selected and recognized. ENGLISH A USB storage device, such as a floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, CD-ROM drive, flash memory reader/writer, etc., can be connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. NOTE (CLP-370/340) If you connect USB storage devices to both USB [TO DEVICE] terminals, the devices may not operate properly. NOTE Do not connect a USB hub to the instrument. SELECT USB TO DEVICE NOTE USB [TO DEVICE] terminal B Both are the same terminal; however, both cannot be used at the same time. Use the [SELECT] switch to select the desired terminal. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the bottom. When the device is mounting, the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator flashes. When the mounting operation is completed, the indicator goes off. CAUTION Remove the USB storage device from the instrument before you switch the A/B terminals. NOTE Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save, Export, Load, Delete or Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection: until the FILE LOAD LED flash stops), do NOT use the [SELECT] switch. Doing so may corrupt the media or data. CAUTION Disconnect the optional USB storage device connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] A terminal before closing the key cover. Closing the cover with the device still connected may damage the device. Formatting USB storage media When executing a file-related operation with a connected USB storage device, a “For” message may appear, indicating that the device or media may be unformatted. If this happens, format the media (page 40). CAUTION The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Proceed with caution. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 73 Connections To protect your data (write-protect): To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. To display the data in the USB storage device To view the data of the USB storage device on the CLP display, press the [SONG SELECT] button a few times until the “USB” indicator lights (page 45). Backing up your data to a computer ENGLISH ■ Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB storage device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saves internal data to a USB storage device. Instrument USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the instrument and connect it to the computer. Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders. Computer USB storage device ■ Copying files from a computer hard disk to a USB storage device Files contained on the hard disk of a computer can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to the storage media, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. Not only files created on the instrument itself but also Standard MIDI files created on other devices can be copied to a USB storage device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal of the instrument, and play back the data on the instrument. Copying the files of the hard disk of the computer to the USB storage device. Computer USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument. Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument. USB [TO DEVICE] terminal USB storage device 74 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Instrument Connections Connecting a Personal Computer By connecting a computer to the Clavinova’s USB [TO HOST] terminal, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. To do this, install the USB-MIDI driver and Musicsoft Downloader software (refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). CAUTION CAUTION If you are not using the connection between the Clavinova and your computer, you must disconnect the cable from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The Clavinova may not operate correctly if a cable is left connected. Use a USB cable to connect the USB port on your computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal on the Clavinova. Instrument USB TO DEVICE TO HOST USB [TO HOST] terminal TERMINOLOGY Driver: A driver is software that provides a data-transfer interface between the computer’s operating system and a connected hardware device. You need to install a USB MIDI driver to connect the computer and the instrument. NOTE • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. ENGLISH When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables. After making connections, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. USB cable Computer Precautions when using the USB [TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB [TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/ unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB [TO HOST] terminal. - Quit any open application software on the computer. - Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 75 Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument In addition to the demo songs and the 50 piano preset songs stored in this instrument, you can play data for other song by loading it from a connected computer. To be able to use this function, you must first download Musicsoft Downloader from Yamaha website, and install it on your computer (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide”). ENGLISH System requirement for Musicsoft Downloader • OS : Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/Vista *For XP and Vista, the 32-bit version is supported, but not the 64-bit version. • CPU • Display : Intel® Pentium® or Celeron® chip of 233MHz or Higher (500 MHz or higher is recommended) or higher : 64MB or more (256MB or more is recommended) : at least 128MB of free space (at least 512MB of free space is recommended) disk capacity : 800 x 600 High Color (16-bit) • Others : Microsoft® Internet Explorer® version 5.5 or higher • Memory • Available hard Loading Song Data from a Computer to the Instrument You can load piano song data from a computer to this instrument. Also, after you record your performance on this instrument and save the recording to a computer, you can load the recording back to the instrument. This instrument can read MIDI data in SMF Format 0. However, if such data includes any information for functions that are not supported by this instrument, the instrument will not play the data correctly. For more information on loading song data from a computer to this instrument, please refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the Help file that came with Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE You can download free Musicsoft Downloader from the Yamaha website. NOTE Do not manually change the file name by using a computer; doing so will render the file unable for loading on the instrument. NOTE SMF (Standard MIDI File) This file features a popular sequence format (for recording performance data). This file is sometimes called a “MIDI file.” The file extension is MID. You can play the SMF format song using music software or a sequencer that supports SMF. This instrument also supports SMF. Requirements for song data that can be loaded from a computer to this instrument • Songs • Maximum data size • Data format : : : : user songs (loaded from instrument), SMF Format 0 songs 748KB SMF Format 0 Backuped data (loaded from instrument) File name 08CLP-M.BUP (CLP-370/340) 08CLP-ML.BUP (CLP-330) 08CLP-S.BUP (CLPS308/S306) You can play the loaded Songs (page 44). NOTE CAUTION Do not turn off the power to this instrument or unplug the instrument during data transmission. Otherwise, the data being transmitted will not be saved. Furthermore, flash memory operation may become unstable, causing the entire memory to be erased when you turn the power to the instrument on or off. 76 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Before you use this instrument, close the Musicsoft Downloader window and quit the application. Transmitting Song Data between the Computer and the Instrument Transmitting Song Data from the Instrument to a Computer Musicsoft Downloader enables you to transfer the user song in this instrument to a computer. For more information on transferring song data from this instrument to a computer, please refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the Help file that came with Musicsoft Downloader. Data you can transfer from this instrument to a computer ENGLISH • User song : your recorded songs • Back up data : panel settings • Song data (once it has been loaded from the computer) CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 77 Data Backup Data Backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you save your important data to your computer by using the application Musicsoft Downloader (MSD). This provides a convenient backup if the internal memory is damaged (refer to the “Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide”). ENGLISH Data that can be saved • Panel settings and recorded User songs Panel settings are the same data that can be backed up using the Backup Functions (page 70). You can save the panel settings and recorded User songs as one file. NOTE The file described in #1 at left cannot be saved to a USB storage device (CLP-370/340). • External songs received via computer. This includes external songs saved from the computer by using Musicsoft Downloader. Procedure 1. Install the USB MIDI driver and the MSD to your computer (Windows), then connect the computer and the instrument. For installation, see the separate Installation Guide. For connection, see page 75. 2. Move the data to the computer. By using the MSD, save the “CLP-xxx.BUP” file from “System Drive” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer. The “CLP-xxx.BUP” file contains the panel settings and recorded User songs. Also, if you store the external songs in the instrument from the computer, move the songs from “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer via the MSD. For instruction on using the MSD, see the Help in the MSD. To recall the settings and load the songs to the instrument, move the “CLPxxx.BUP” file and the External songs under the folders to which you saved the files. NOTE When MSD is started on a computer connected to the instrument, “con (computer connection)” appears in the display. When this indication appears, you cannot operate the instrument. NOTE The Musicsoft Downloader cannot be used when the instrument is in the following state: • During Demo mode. • During song playback. • During Record mode. • During file operation (one of the [FILE] button indicators is lit). NOTE The panel settings and User songs (CLP-xxx.BUP file) remain in the instrument after being saved to the computer. 78 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Message List Message List Message CLr Comment Displayed after factory presets are recalled. CAUTION con Displayed when Musicsoft Downloader is started on a computer connected to the instrument. When this message appears, you cannot operate the instrument. E01 Indicates failure in accessing the USB storage device because the device or media is damaged. E02 Displayed when the song data is damaged or not recognized. E04 Indicates that the song data is too large to be loaded. End Displayed when the current operation is completed. Err Displayed when the MIDI/USB cable is disconnected while starting Musicsoft Downloader on a computer connected to the instrument. FCL Indicates that internal memory has been cleaned up. Recorded songs, panel settings and external songs which have been loaded from a computer are cleared, because the power has been turned off before the song save or load operations were completed. ENGLISH Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “CLr” appears in the display. Doing so may delete all song data in the instrument, including external songs (page 44). CAUTION Do not turn off the power of the instrument when “FCL” appears in the display. For Indicates that the instrument has engaged format mode for the USB storage device. FUL Displayed when internal memory becomes full during song recording. Displayed when the USB storage device becomes full and the song cannot be saved. Displayed when the total amount of files has become too large. Lod Displayed when a protected song is loading. ny Confirms whether each operation is executed or not. n–y Reconfirms whether the overwriting, delete or format operation is executed or not. Pro Indicates that the USB storage device or media is protected. * Regarding the messages (and their explanations) for Internet Direct Connection, refer to the Yamaha web site: http://services.music.yamaha.com/ CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 79 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting ENGLISH Problem Possible Cause and Solution The Clavinova does not turn on. The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet (page 14). A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is being applied to the instrument. Noise is heard from the speakers or headphones. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. • Make sure a pair of headphones is not connected to the headphones jack (when the SPEAKER switch is set to the “NORMAL” position). If the SPEAKER switch is set to the “OFF” position, set it to “NORMAL” or “ON” (page 15). • Make sure that Local Control (page 68) is ON. The speakers do not switch off when a pair of headphones is connected. The SPEAKER switch may be switched “ON.” Set the SPEAKER switch to the “NORMAL” position (page 15). The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pedal cable/plug may not be properly connected. Make sure to securely insert the pedal plug into the proper jack (pages 83, 86). The speaker sound is changed. The AUX OUT jack may be connected. Make sure to disconnect the plug (see page 71). Even though a USB storage device is connected, the SONG SELECT “USB” indicator does not turn on when pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. The USB storage device may not be recognized by the instrument, depending on the device itself or the timing of the recognition. 1. (CLP-370/340) cheek the [SELECT] switch. Switching to “A” selects the terminal on the left of the panel, while switching to “B” selects the terminal panel at the bottom. 2. Check that the device is not damaged. Check that the FILE “LOAD TO USER” indicator flashes after connecting the USB storage device. If the indicator does not flash, the device may be damaged. 3. Check that the compatibility of the device has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 73). 4. Select SONG SELECT “USB” again. It may take a while for the instrument to recognize the USB storage device. Press the [SONG SELECT] button again to turn the “USB” indicator on. The USB storage device has hung up (stopped). • The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. Only use the devices whose compatibility has been confirmed by Yamaha (page 73). • Turn the instrument off and disconnect the device, then turn it back on and reconnect the device. The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,” “LOAD TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE] button flash simultaneously when a storage device is connected. Disconnect the USB storage device and turn the power of the instrument off. The USB storage device is not compatible with the instrument. The three LEDs of “SAVE TO USB,” “LOAD TO USER” and “DEL/FORMAT” at the [FILE] button flash simultaneously for five seconds when the USB storage device is operated. Try disconnect the USB storage device once, then reconnect it. Nothing is indicated in the LED display. Press the [–/NO] or [+YES] button and try again the operation again. Options BC-100 Bench A comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova. HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads. UD-FD01 USB-FDD Unit Floppy disk drive for connecting to the instrument and saving/loading data. 80 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. ENGLISH Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. Assembly Parts A 6 x 25 mm long screws x 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x 4 6 x 16 mm short screws x 6 Cord holders x 2 Foamed styrol pads Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them on the floor, then place A on top of them. Position the pads so that they will not block the speaker box on the bottom of A. 4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2 B Headphone hanger 4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2 C Headphone hanger A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side. Power cord D E CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 81 CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 3. Attach C to D and E. D Mount A. Make sure that you mount the main unit by holding the front bottom in areas that are at least 15 cm towards the center from either end and by the handles on the rear panel. C A E 1-2 ENGLISH 1-1 1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later in step 5. 1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long screws (6 x 25 mm). 2. 2-1 2-2 2-3 15 cm or further in Align the screw holes. Attach B. Depending on the model of Clavinova you purchased, the surface color of one side of B may be different from the other side. In this case, position B so that the side of the surface color most similar to D and E faces you (as you would play the instrument) Align the screw holes on the upper side of B with the bracket holes on D and E, then attach the upper corners of B to D and E by finger-tightening two thin screws (4 x 12 mm). Secure the bottom end of B using four tapping screws (4 x 20 mm). CAUTION Be extra careful not to drop or let your fingers be pinched by the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the position specified above. 4. Secure A. 4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally (as seen from the front). 4-2 Secure A by tightening six short screws (6 x 16 mm) from the front. 4-1 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were attached in Step 2-1. A Projection of A 2-1 2-3 E A B D 2-2 82 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 4-2 CLP-370: Keyboard Stand Assembly 5. 7. Connect the pedal cord. 5-1 Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the plug into the pedal connector. 5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. PE DA 5-1 L Attach the headphone hanger. Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to attach the hanger as shown in the illustration. ENGLISH 8. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in firm contact with the floor surface. 110 127 220 6-2 240 6-1 After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. 5-2 5-3 • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. 6. 6-1 • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Check the connection. Connect the power cord. Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a voltage selector). Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 6-2 Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the plug into the power connector. • If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold instrument by the lower surface in the front of the main unit and by the handles in the rear of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Key cover Hold here. Do not hold here. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 83 CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly ENGLISH CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. Assembly Parts 6 x 25 mm long screws x 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x 4 6 x 16 mm short screws x 4 Cord holders x 2 A Foamed styrol pads Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them on the floor, then place A on top of them. Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors on the bottom of A. 4 x 12 mm thin screws x 2 Headphone hanger B 4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2 C A bundled pedal cord is attached to the reverse side. Power cord D 84 E CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Headphone hanger CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 3. Attach C to D and E. D C E A 15 cm or further in 1-2 1-1 Untie and straighten out the bundled pedal cord. Do not discard the vinyl tie. You will need it later in step 5. 1-2 Attach D and E to C by tightening four long screws (6 x 25 mm). 2. 15 cm or further in ENGLISH 1-1 Mount A. Be sure to place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of the main unit when positioning it. CAUTION Attach B. Depending on the model of Clavinova you purchased, the surface color of one side of B may be different from the other side. In this case, position B so that the side of the surface color most similar to D and E faces you (as you would play the instrument). Be extra careful not to drop or let your fingers be pinched by the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the main unit in any position other than the position specified above. 4. Secure A. 2-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then align the screw holes on the upper side of B with the bracket holes on D and E. 4-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally (as seen from the front). 2-2 Attach the top corners of B to D and E by fingertightening two thin screws (4 x 12 mm). 4-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x 16 mm) from the front. 2-3 While pushing the lower part of D and E from outside, secure the bottom end of B using four tapping screws (4 x 20 mm). 2-4 Securely tighten the screws on the top of B that were attached in Step 2-2. 4-1 Projection of A A 2-2 2-4 2-1 E Place the bottom end of the rear panel on each foot. B D 4-2 Insert the screw in the front of these two holes. 2-3 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 85 CLP-340/330: Keyboard Stand Assembly 5. Connect the pedal cord and power cord. Pass the pedal cord from the rear and insert the plug into the pedal connector. 5-2 Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. 5-3 Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. P E D A L 5-1 7. 8. Set the adjuster. Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Attach the headphone hanger. Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to attach the hanger as shown in the illustration. S NE O PH ENGLISH 5-1 5-3 After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. 5-2 6-2 6. 6-1 6-1 Connect the power cord. Set the voltage selector (for models that feature a voltage selector). Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 6-2 • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Check the connection. • If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Top portion Pass the power cord from the rear and insert the plug into the power connector. Key cover Do not hold here. Hold here. Do not hold here. 86 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly ENGLISH CAUTION • Assemble the unit on a flat floor surface. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct orientation. Please assemble the unit in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use only the included screws of the specified sizes. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten all screws upon completing assembly of the unit. • To disassemble the unit, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Philips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. A Assembly Parts Protective sheet 6 x 20 mm long screws x 10 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x 5 6 x 16 mm short screws x 6 Cord holders x 2 Connector panel Foamed styrol pads Remove foamed styrol pads from the package, position them on the floor, then place A on top of them. Position the pads so that they will not hide the connectors on the bottom of A. 4 x 14 mm thin screws x 5 CAUTION Please keep the protective sheet for later use. It will be used to protect the keyboard from being scratched when the instrument is transported. The protective sheet should be spread over the entire keyboard before closing the key cover. Headphone hanger 4 x 10 mm thin screws x 2 Headphone hanger B Power cord C Pedal cord D E F CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 87 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly 1. 3. Attach D to E and F. 1-1 1-3 F Mount A. 3-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of A to mount it. 3-2 Position A so that the stopper-wood on the rear side of the bottom of A will be located behind the front panel, then slide A slowly toward the rear while lightly pushing E and F toward the center. * Be sure to slide the guide pins 1 on each side of A into the guide slots 2 on E and F respectively. E D 1 ENGLISH 1-2 1-1 A 2 Attach D to E and F by using four long screws (6 x 20 mm). 1-2 Secure D from the rear using two long screws (6 x 20 mm). 1-3 Remove the twist tie from the folded pedal cord. Do not remove the twist tie that is located next to the hole. 15cm or further in 3-1 F 3-2 15cm E or further in 1 2 CAUTION 2. 2-1 2-2 Be extra careful to avoid pinching your fingers or dropping A. Temporarily mount B. CAUTION Insert B between E and F as shown in the illustration. Align and attach B to the front side of D, E and F. 2-1 2-2 F B Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. 4. 4-1 Secure A from the rear using two short screws (6 x 16 mm). 4-2 Secure A from the rear using two thin screws (4 x 14 mm). 4-3 Secure A from the front using four short screws (6 x 16mm). E D Secure A. 4-2 2-3 Temporarily secure B by finger-tightening four long screws (6 x 20mm). * Insert four screws into the larger holes (all four holes) on the brackets. 2-4 Secure B using a thin screw (4 x 14 mm). * Insert the screw into the smaller hole on the bracket. 2-4 2-3 88 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual A 4-1 4-4 4-3 Firmly tighten the screws you temporarily fastened on B in steps 2-3 above. 4-4 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly 5-1 5-2 Connect the speaker cord. 8. Remove the twist tie attaching the speaker cord. 8-1 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage. Insert the speaker cord plug into the connector so that the protruding tab on the plug faces toward right when viewed from the rear. 5-2 6. Connect the power cord. Connect the pedal cord. 6-1 Insert the pedal cord plug into the [PEDAL] connector. 6-2 Attach the cord holders to the instrument as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. At this time, be careful not to allow too much slack in the pedal cord between the plug and cord holder. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC IN and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. ENGLISH 5. WARNING An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. 6-1 8-2 6-2 E 9. Insert the AC power cord plug into the [AC IN] connector. Set the adjuster to secure the pedals. Rotate the adjuster until the pedal box comes in firm contact with the floor surface. 7. Attach C. 7-1 Place on D, the stopper-wood in the bottom corners of C, then attach the top of C. 7-2 Secure upper right and left of C using two thin screws (4 x 14 mm). 7-3 Secure upper center and bottom of C using five tapping screws (4 x 20 mm). 10. Attach the headphone hanger. Use the included two screws (4 x 10 mm) to attach the hanger as shown in the illustration. 7-2 7-1 D C C 7-3 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 89 CLP-S308/S306: Keyboard Stand Assembly After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? Tighten all screws. ENGLISH • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? Check the connection. • If the unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. CAUTION Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. CAUTION When transporting the instrument, cover the entire keyboard with the protective sheet (page 87) before closing the key cover. The sheet will protect the keyboard from being scratched. Top portion Key cover Do not hold here. Hold here. 90 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340) Installing the Optional Floppy Disk Drive (CLP-370/340) The optional UD-FD01 floppy disk drive can be installed to the bottom of the instrument by using the included floppy disk drive case and screws. ENGLISH For the CLP-330 and CLP-S308/S306: The disk drive can be used with the instrument but cannot be attached as described here. When using the floppy disk drive with these models, simply put the drive on the top panel. Make sure to remove the connected disk cable before you close the key cover. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1. Remove the three backing papers from the adhesive tape in the case, and fit the floppy disk drive into the case. 3. Attach the drive and case assembly to the left underside of the instrument, using the included four screws (4mm x 10mm). Insert the drive to the case, with the side having the rubber stoppers facing the case. 4. Connect the USB cable to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Dual-sided adhesive tape 2. Fold the USB cable inside the case as shown. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 91 Preset Voice List Preset Voice List : Yes : No CLP-370/340 Voice Name Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 GRANDPIANO 1 ENGLISH VARIATION GRANDPIANO 2 VARIATION E.PIANO 1 VARIATION E.PIANO 2 VARIATION HARPSICHORD VARIATION E. CLAVICHORD VARIATION VIBRAPHONE VARIATION CHURCH ORGAN Voice Descriptions Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Also includes four levels of dynamic sampling, sustain samples, and key-off samples for exceptionally realistic acoustic grand piano sound. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. Warm and mellow piano. Good for classical compositions. Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popular music. Bright, spacious piano. Good for popular or rock music. An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. Good for standard popular music. A synth-generated type electronic piano sound often heard in popular music. Used in the DUAL mode it blends well with an acoustic piano voice. The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. A slightly different electric piano sound often heard in rock and popular music. The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant tone. A hammer-struck keyboard instrument that utilizes an electric pickup that is often heard in funk and soul music. Its tone is noted for the unique sound produced when the keys are released. Includes a unique preset effect. Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. Stereo-sampled, spacious, and realistic marimba. This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet). Good for sacred music from the Baroque period. VARIATION This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.” JAZZ ORGAN The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. VARIATION Uses a rotary speaker effect with a different speed. The variations speed is faster. If the variation is selected while holding a chord, the speed of the effect will gradually change. STRINGS VARIATION CHOIR VARIATION 92 Key-Off Sampling*2 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. A choir voice with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. Preset Voice List GUITAR VARIATION WOOD BASS VARIATION E.BASS VARIATION Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet ambience of nylon strings. Bright, brilliant steel guitar. Suitable for popular music. An upright bass played fingerstyle. Ideal for jazz and Latin music. Adds a cymbal voice to the bass sound. Ideal for walking bass lines in jazz tunes. Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. A fretless bass good for styles such as jazz, fusion, etc. *1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument. *2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual ENGLISH Voice Name 93 Preset Voice List : Yes : No CLP-330, CLP-S308/S306 ENGLISH Voice Name Stereo Sampling Touch Response Dynamic Sampling*1 Key-Off Sampling*2 Voice Descriptions GRANDPIANO 1 Recorded samples from a full concert grand piano. Perfect for classical compositions as well as any other style that requires acoustic piano. GRANDPIANO 2 Spacious and clear piano with bright reverb. Good for popular music. E.PIANO 1 An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Good for standard popular music. E.PIANO 2 The sound of an electric piano using hammer-struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. HARPSICHORD 1 The definitive instrument for baroque music. Since harpsichord uses plucked strings, there is no touch response. There is, however, a characteristic additional sound when the keys are released. HARPSICHORD 2 Mixes the same voice an octave higher for a more brilliant tone. VIBRAPHONE Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets. The tone becomes more metallic the harder you play. CHURCH ORGAN 1 This is a typical pipe organ sound (8 feet + 4 feet + 2 feet). Good for sacred music from the Baroque period. CHURCH ORGAN 2 This is the organ’s full coupler sound often associated with Bach’s “Toccata and Fugue.” JAZZ ORGAN The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. STRINGS 1 Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble with realistic reverb. Try combining this voice with piano in the DUAL mode. STRINGS 2 Spacious strings ensemble with a slow attack. Try combining this voice with a piano or electric piano in the DUAL mode. CHOIR A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. GUITAR Warm and natural-sounding nylon guitar. Enjoy the quiet ambience of nylon strings. *1. Dynamic Sampling provides multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately simulate the timbral response of an acoustic instrument. *2. Contains a very subtle sample that is produced when the keys are released. 94 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Demo Song List Demo Song List : Included : Not included CLP-370/340 CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 Title GRAND PIANO1 Albumbard, Lyriske stykker IV, op.47-2 HARPSICHORD Concerto a cembalo obbligato, 2 violini, viola e continuo No.7, BWV.1058 HARPSICHORD1 HARPSICHORD2 Gigue, Französische Suiten Nr.5, BWV.816 CHURCH ORGAN CHURCH ORGAN1 Herr Christ, der ein’ge GottesSohn, BWV.601 CHURCH ORGAN2 Triosonate Nr.6, BWV.530 Composer E. H. Grieg J. S. Bach ENGLISH Voice Name The demonstration pieces listed above are short rearranged excerpts of the original compositions. All other songs are original (©2008 Yamaha Corporation). Piano Voice Demo Description (CLP-370/340) Voice Name Piano Voice Demo GRAND PIANO1 Stereo sampling GRAND PIANO2 Monaural sampling E.PIANO1 With sustain sampling E.PIANO2 Without sustain sampling HARPSICHORD With key-off sampling E.CLAVICHORD Without key-off sampling CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 95 Index Index Numerics 50 greats for the Piano .....................................................17 50 Piano Preset Songs ......................................................17 A ENGLISH A-B Repeat .......................................................................19 Adjust Tempo (50 Piano Preset Songs) ...............................17 Tempo (Recorded Songs) .........................................44 Volume (50 Piano Preset Songs) ..............................17 Volume (Metronome) ..............................................67 ALL (LED display) .....................................................17, 45 Assembly ..........................................................................81 Equal Temperament ........................................................ 63 Export .............................................................................. 36 F Factory Setting List .......................................................... 98 [FILE] button .................................................................. 37 Fine Tuning of the Pitch ................................................. 62 Floppy Disk Drive ........................................................... 42 Installation................................................................. 91 Format ................................................................. 40, 41, 42 Function........................................................................... 62 Basic Procedure......................................................... 60 Parameter List ........................................................... 59 AUX IN [L/L+R][R] jacks ...............................................72 AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] jacks...........................................71 H Half-pedal ........................................................................ 21 B Hz (Hertz) ....................................................................... 62 Backup (Data) ..................................................................78 Backup Functions ............................................................70 I [BRILLIANCE] button ....................................................22 Internet Direct Connection ............................................ 46 Internet Settings .............................................................. 49 C Internet song.................................................................... 56 Character Code ................................................................70 Combining Two Voices (Dual mode) ............................26 K Connecting a Personal Computer.......................75, 76, 77 Key Cover ........................................................................ 12 Connection to a USB storage device ...............................73 Keyboard Stand ............................................................... 81 Connections .....................................................................71 Computer.......................................................75, 76, 77 USB storage device ....................................................73 Keyoff Sample Volume ................................................... 66 Connectors .......................................................................71 L D LAN Port driver ............................................................... 53 Damper Pedal ..................................................................21 [LAN] terminal................................................................ 72 Damper Pedal Range .......................................................65 [LEFT] button ........................................................... 18, 33 [DAMPER RES.] button .................................................23 Left Pedal ......................................................................... 21 Damper Resonance ..........................................................23 Left Pedal Mode............................................................... 66 Delete ...............................................................................39 Demonstration Tunes .....................................................16 List Factory Setting........................................................... 98 Functions ................................................................... 59 Preset Voice ............................................................... 94 Display .............................................................................14 Load ..................................................................... 36, 38, 45 [DEMO] button...............................................................16 Demo Song List................................................................95 Kirnberger........................................................................ 63 LAN Settings .............................................................. 49, 70 Dual mode .................................................................26, 64 M 96 E [MASTER VOLUME] slider ........................................... 15 [EFFECT] button.......................................................22, 23 Mean Tone....................................................................... 63 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Index Message List .....................................................................79 [SELECT] switch ............................................................. 73 Metronome ......................................................................29 SMF (Standard MIDI File).............................................. 36 METRONOME [ON/OFF] button ...........................67, 29 Soft Pedal ................................................................... 21, 66 Metronome Volume ........................................................67 Soft Pedal Effect Depth ................................................... 66 MIDI ................................................................................72 Song ................................................................................. 17 MIDI Functions ...............................................................67 SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] button ........................... 16, 17, 44 MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] terminals ............................72 [SONG SELECT] button .......................................... 17, 44 Music Braces (CLP-370/340) ..........................................14 SONG [STOP] button............................................... 17, 44 Music Rest ........................................................................13 [SPEAKER] switch .......................................................... 15 Musicsoft Downloader ....................................................78 Specifications ................................................................. 100 [SPLIT] button ................................................................ 27 Normal setting .................................................................22 Split mode .................................................................. 27, 65 Split Point .................................................................. 27, 65 P Part Cancel .......................................................................18 Part Playback On and Off................................................45 [PEDAL] jack ...................................................................83 Pedal Play/Pause ..............................................................45 Sustain Sample Depth ..................................................... 66 Sync (Synchronized) ....................................................... 45 ENGLISH SPLIT (CLP-370/340) (Function) .................................. 65 N Sync Start ......................................................................... 18 T Pedals ...............................................................................21 [TEMPO/FUNCTION] button ................................ 29, 60 [PHONES] jacks ..............................................................15 [TOUCH] button ............................................................ 24 Piano Voice Demo Description ......................................95 Touch Sensitivity ............................................................. 24 [PLAY/PAUSE] button..............................................16, 17 Transporting ...................................................................... 6 Play/Pause playback Useful Playback Functions........................................45 [TRANSPOSE] button .................................................... 25 Playing Back Songs ....................................................43, 44 Troubleshooting .............................................................. 80 Transposition .................................................................. 25 [POWER] switch .............................................................14 Practicing a One-Hand Part Using the 50 Preset Songs.18 U Preset Song .......................................................................17 USB Storage Device ................................................... 40, 73 Preset Voice List.........................................................92, 94 USB [TO DEVICE] terminal .................................... 72, 73 Program version number ................................................53 USB [TO HOST] terminal ........................................ 72, 75 Pure Major .......................................................................63 USB-LAN Adapter........................................................... 54 Pure Minor.......................................................................63 Pythagorean .....................................................................63 R V [VARIATION] button .................................................... 22 Voice ................................................................................ 20 [REC] button ...................................................................31 Voice group buttons........................................................ 20 Recording .........................................................................30 Initial Settings............................................................35 RIGHT/LEFT parts....................................................33 W Re-recording ..............................................................32, 34 Werckmeister................................................................... 63 [REVERB] button ............................................................22 [RIGHT] button ........................................................18, 33 Right Pedal .......................................................................21 rnd (LED display) ......................................................17, 45 S Save.............................................................................36, 37 Scale..................................................................................63 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 97 Appendix Factory Setting List / Liste der Vorgabeeinstellungen / Liste des réglages / Lista de ajustes de fábrica Backup Group Default Voice Variation (CLP-370/340) F7.1 OFF — OFF Split Mode (CLP-370/340) OFF F8.1 NORMAL Reverb Type Preset for each voice Reverb Depth Preset for each voice Effect Type Preset for each voice Effect Depth Preset for each voice Touch Sensitivity F7.1 — WOOD BASS Brilliance CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 GRAND PIANO 1 Dual Mode Split Mode Left Voice (CLP-370/340) CLP-370/ 340 F8.4 F7.4 F8.1 F7.1 MEDIUM Volume in the FIXED Mode 64 DAMPER RES. ON F8.4 — 6 F8.4 — DAMPER RES. Depth Metronome Metronome Time Signature OFF — — 0 (no accent) — — Tempo Transpose 120 — — 0 F8.3 F7.3 Function CLP-370/ 340 Function Default F1 F1 Tuning A3=440Hz F2.1 F2.1 Scale 1 (Equal Temperament) F2.2 F2.2 Base Note C F3.1 F3.1 Dual Balance Preset for each voice combination F3.2 F3.2 Dual Detune Preset for each voice combination F3.3, F3.4 F3.3, F3.4 Dual Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination F3.5, F.3.6 F3.5, F.3.6 Dual Effect Depth F4.1 — Split Point Preset for each voice combination F2 F4.2 — Split Balance Preset for each voice combination F4.3, F4.4 — Split Octave Shift Preset for each voice combination F4.5, F4.6 — Split Effect Depth Preset for each voice combination F4.7 — F5.1 F4.1 F5.2 F4.2 F5.3 — F5.4 98 Backup Group CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 — Damper Pedal Range ALL Left Pedal Mode 1 (Soft Pedal) Soft Pedal Effect Depth 3 Sustain Sample Depth 12 Keyoff Sample Volume 10 F5.5 F4.3 Song Channel Selection ALL F6 F5 Metronome Volume 10 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 F8.3 F7.3 F8.1 F7.1 F8.4 F7.4 F8.1 F7.1 CLP-370/ 340 Backup Group CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 Function Default F7.1 F6.1 MIDI Transmit Channel 1 F7.2 F6.2 MIDI Receive Channel ALL F7.3 F6.3 Local Control ON F7.4 F6.4 Program Change Send & Receive ON F7.5 F6.5 Control Change Send & Receive ON F8 F7 Backup Voice: OFF MIDI – Others: ON F8.5 F7.5 Character Code Int CLP-370/ 340 CLP-330, CLP-S308/ S306 F8.2 F7.2 Always backed up CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 99 Specifications / Technische Daten / Caractéristiques techniques / Especificaciones CLP-370 Size / Weight CLP-340 CLP-330 CLP-S308 Width 1408 mm (55-7/16") 1449 mm (57-1/16") Height [For models with polished finish] 917 mm (36-1/8") [920 mm (36-1/4")] [977 mm (38-7/16")] Height with music rest [For models with polished finish] Depth Weight [For models with polished finish] 1018 mm (40-1/16") [1019 mm (40-1/8")] 511mm (20-1/8") 1019 mm (40-1/8") [1021 mm (40-3/16")] — 514mm (20-1/4") 430 mm (16-15/16") 78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.) 69 kg (152lbs., 2 oz.) 65 kg (143lbs., 5 oz.) [81 kg (178lbs., 9 oz.)] [71 kg (156lbs., 8 oz.)] [68 kg (149lbs., 15 oz.)] Number of Keys [78 kg (171lbs., 15 oz.)] 88 NW Keyboard Type Control Interface NW (Natural Wood) with Synthetic ivory keytops (Wood is used for the white keys) GH3 (Graded Hammer 3) with Synthetic ivory keytops Number of Pedal 3 7-Segment LED Sliding Music Rest Yes — AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Stereo Sustain Samples Yes — Key-off Samples Yes — Number of Polyphony (Max.) 128 14 x 2 variations 14 Reverb 4 types Brilliance 5 types Chorus Yes Dual Yes Split 100 Folding Yes Tone Generation Technology Number of Voices CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual GH3 (Graded Hammer 3) with Synthetic ivory keytops Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft Key Cover Style Music Clips (Natural Wood) with Synthetic ivory keytops (Wood is used for the white keys) Yes Display Effect (Graded Hammer 3) Yes Pedal Functions Voices GH3 Touch Sensitivity Half Pedal Cabinet CLP-S306 Yes — CLP-370 CLP-340 CLP-330 Number of Preset Songs Songs Recording Compatible Data Format Number of Songs 3 Number of Tracks 2 Data Capacity User songs (100KB X 3 (ca.11,000 notes X 3)), External songs (447KB) Playback SMF (Format 0 & 1) Recording SMF (Format 0) Yes Tempo Range 32-280 Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12 Tuning Storage Yes Scale Type 7 types Floppy Disk Drive Optional Internal Memory User songs 300KB, External songs 447KB External Device Optional Headphones x2 MIDI Connectivity [IN][OUT][THRU] AUX IN [L/L+R][R] AUX OUT [L/L+R][R] x2 (selectable) USB [TO DEVICE] x1 USB [TO HOST] Yes Yes — Yes Amplifiers 40W x 2 20W x 2 40W x 2 Speakers (16cm + 5cm) x 2 16cm x 2 (16cm + 5cm) x 2 [LAN] Amplifiers/ Speakers Speaker Boxes Bundled Software CLP-S306 50 Metronome Functions CLP-S308 Yes Yes — CD-ROM Yes Accessories Included Accessories Owner’s Manual, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows, Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, “50 greats for the Piano” Score Collection, My Yamaha Product User Registration, Bench (included or optional depending on locale) * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. * Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. * Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. * Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha. CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 101 MEMO 102 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual MEMO CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual 103 MEMO 104 CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308/S306 Owner’s Manual Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUT I O N RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON,” please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (2 wires) (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Piano Model Name : CLP-370/340/330, CLP-S308PE/ S306PE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE FINLAND Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB45 DIC 2164 Yamaha Home Keyboards Home Page http://music.yamaha.com/homekeyboard/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2008 Yamaha Corporation WN75950 109MWAP*.*-**B1 Printed in China
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108

Yamaha S306 de handleiding

Categorie
Barebones voor pc / werkstation
Type
de handleiding